Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Subaru Manual
Subaru Manual
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
*
C Copyright 2010 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
1) Legacy
2) Outback
– CONTINUED –
Headlights
Hazard warning flasher
Turn signal
Seat heater
– CONTINUED –
. The SRS airbags deploy with & Child safety with considerable speed and 0
considerable speed and force. force and can injure or even kill
Occupants who are out of proper WARNING children, especially if they are
position when the SRS airbag not restrained or improperly re-
deploys could suffer very serious . Never hold a child on your lap or strained. Because children are
injuries. Because the SRS airbag in your arms while the vehicle is lighter and weaker than adults,
needs enough space for deploy- moving. The passenger cannot their risk of being injured from
ment, the driver should always protect the child from injury in a deployment is greater.
sit upright and well back in the collision, because the child will . NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
seat as far from the steering be caught between the passen- FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN
wheel as practical while still ger and objects inside the vehi- THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
maintaining full vehicle control cle. RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
and the front passenger should . While riding in the vehicle, in- DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
move the seat as far back as fants and small children should CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
possible and sit upright and well always be placed in the REAR CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
back in the seat. seat in an infant or child restraint . Always turn the child safety locks
system which is appropriate for to the “LOCK” position whenever
For instructions and precautions, carefully the child’s age, height and
read the following sections. a child rides in the rear seat.
weight. If a child is too big for a Serious injury could result if a
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- child restraint system, the child child accidentally opened the
belts” F1-12. should sit in the REAR seat and door and fell out. Refer to “Child
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to be restrained using the seatbelts. safety locks” F2-20.
“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint According to accident statistics,
System airbag)” F1-38. children are safer when properly . Always lock the passengers’ win-
restrained in the rear seating dows using the lock switch when
positions than in the front seat- children are riding in the vehicle.
ing positions. Never allow a child Failure to follow this procedure
to stand up or kneel on the seat. could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Re-
. Put children in the REAR seat fer to “Windows” F2-20.
properly restrained at all times in
a child restraint device or in a . Never leave unattended children,
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys adults or animals in the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
They could accidentally injure System airbag)” F1-38. . If at any time you suspect that
themselves or others through exhaust fumes are entering the
inadvertent operation of the ve- & Engine exhaust gas (carbon vehicle, have the problem
hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, monoxide) checked and corrected as soon
the temperature in a closed ve- as possible. If you must drive
hicle could quickly become high WARNING under these conditions, drive
enough to cause severe or pos- only with all windows fully open.
sibly fatal injuries. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas. . Keep the trunk lid or rear gate
. Help prevent children, adults or Engine exhaust gas contains closed while driving to prevent
animals from locking themselves carbon monoxide, a colorless exhaust gas from entering the
in the trunk. On hot or sunny and odorless gas which is dan- vehicle.
days, the temperature in the gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
trunk could quickly become high . Always properly maintain the en-
enough to cause death or serious gine exhaust system to prevent & Drinking and driving
heat-related injuries including engine exhaust gas from enter-
brain damage to anyone locked ing the vehicle. WARNING
inside, particularly for small chil- . Never run the engine in a closed
dren. space, such as a garage, except Drinking and then driving is very
. When leaving the vehicle, close for the brief time needed to drive dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
all windows and lock all doors. the vehicle in or out of it. stream delays your reaction and
Also make certain that the trunk impairs your perception, judgment
. Avoid remaining in a parked and attentiveness. If you drive after
is closed. vehicle for a long time while the drinking – even if you drink just a
engine is running. If that is little – it will increase the risk of
For instructions and precautions, carefully unavoidable, then use the venti-
read the following sections. being involved in a serious or fatal
lation fan to force fresh air into accident, injuring or killing yourself,
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- the vehicle.
belts” F1-12. your passengers and others. In
. Always keep the front ventilator addition, if you are injured in the
. For the child restraint system, refer to inlet grille free from snow, leaves accident, alcohol may increase the
“Child restraint systems” F1-25. or other obstructions to ensure severity of that injury.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to that the ventilation system al-
“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint ways works properly.
Please don’t drink and drive. after taking any medications that can
make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
driving with others.
0
Drunken driving is one of the most ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If & Car phone/cell phone and
frequent causes of accidents. Since alco- you have a medical condition that requires driving
hol affects all people differently, you may you to take drugs, please consult with
have consumed too much alcohol to drive your doctor. CAUTION
safely even if the level of alcohol in your
Never drive if you are under the influence
blood is below the legal limit. The safest Do not use a car phone/cell phone
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
thing you can do is never drink and drive. while driving; it may distract your
own health and well-being, we urge you
However if you have no choice but to attention from driving and can lead
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
drive, stop drinking and sober up comple- to an accident. If you use a car
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
tely before getting behind the wheel. phone/cell phone, pull off the road
to those drugs.
and park in a safe place before
& Drugs and driving & Driving when tired or sleepy using your phone. In some States/
Provinces, only hands-free phones
WARNING may legally be used while driving.
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
When you are tired or sleepy, your
counter and prescription) that can
reaction will be delayed and your
delay your reaction time and impair
perception, judgment and attentive-
your perception, judgment and at-
ness will be impaired. If you drive
tentiveness. If you drive after taking
when tired or sleepy, your, your
them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’
passengers’ and other persons’ risk
chances of being involved in a
of being involved in a serious or
serious accident may increase.
fatal accident.
Please do not continue to drive but
If you are taking any drugs, check with
instead find a safe place to rest if you
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you
literature that accompanies the medication
should make periodic rest stops to refresh
to determine if the drug you are taking can
yourself before continuing on your journey.
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
When possible, you should share the
– CONTINUED –
& Modification of your vehicle in the front passenger’s seat. For further & California proposition 65
information, consult your veterinarian, warning
CAUTION local animal protection society or pet
shop. WARNING
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU & Tire pressures Engine exhaust, some of its consti-
parts and accessories. Other types tuents, and certain vehicle compo-
of modifications could affect its WARNING nents contain or emit chemicals
performance, safety or durability, known to the State of California to
and may even violate governmental Driving at high speeds with exces- cause cancer and birth defects or
regulations. In addition, damage or sively low tire pressures can cause other reproductive harm. In addi-
performance problems resulting the tires to deform severely and to tion, certain fluids in vehicles and
from modification may not be cov- rapidly become hot. A sharp in- certain components of product wear
ered under warranties. crease in temperature could cause contain or emit chemicals known to
tread separation, and destruction of the State of California to cause
the tires. The resulting loss of cancer and birth defects or other
& Driving with pets vehicle control could lead to an reproductive harm.
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your accident.
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collision or sudden stop, Check and, if necessary, adjust the & California Perchlorate Advi-
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown pressure of each tire (including the spare) sory
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or at least once a month and before any long
journey. Certain vehicle components such as air-
your passengers. Besides, the pets can bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
be hurt under these situations. It is also for Check the tire pressure when the tires are keyless entry transmitter batteries may
their own safety that pets should be cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the contain perchlorate material. Special
properly restrained in your vehicle. Re- tire pressures to the values shown on the handling may apply for service or vehicle
strain a pet with a special traveling tire placard. For detailed information, refer end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
harness which can be secured to the rear to “Tires and wheels” F11-33. hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
Table of contents
10
1) Engine hood lock release (page 11-7)
Illustrated index 2) Headlight switch (page 3-28)
3) Bulb replacement (page 11-48)
& Exterior 4) Wiper switch (page 3-32)
5) Moonroof (page 2-28)
6) Roof rail (page 8-14)
7) Door locks (page 2-4)
8) Tire pressure (page 11-35)
9) Flat tires (page 9-6)
10) Fog light switch (page 3-30)
11) Tie-down hooks (page 9-13)
12) Towing hook (page 9-12)
11
1) Rear window defogger button
(page 3-34) 0
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-3)
3) Child safety locks (page 2-20)
4) Towing hook (page 9-12)
5) Tie-down hooks (page 9-13)
6) Trunk lid (page 2-24)
7) Rear gate (page 2-26)
8) Bulb replacement (page 11-52)
9) Rear wiper switch (page 3-34)
– CONTINUED –
12
13
1) Top tether anchorages (page 1-36)
2) Cargo area light (page 6-3) 0
3) Rear center seatbelt (page 1-18)
4) Cargo area cover (page 6-15)
– CONTINUED –
14
1) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-16)/Select lever
(AT and CVT) (page 7-19)
2) Climate control (page 4-1)
3) Audio (page 5-1)
4) Navigation system (Refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the navigation
system)
5) Multi function display (page 3-25)
6) Glove box (page 6-6)
7) Cup holder (page 6-8)
15
– CONTINUED –
16
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Windshield wiper (page 3-31)
2) Mist (page 3-32)
3) Windshield washer (page 3-33)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-34)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-33)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-32)
7) Light control switch (page 3-27)
8) Front fog light switch (page 3-30)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-28)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-28)
11) Turn signal lever (page 3-29)
17
& Combination meter 1) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-6) 0
! U.S.-spec. models 2) Tachometer (page 3-7)
3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-6)
4) Speedometer (page 3-6)
5) Multi function display switching knob
(page 3-25)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)
7) Coolant temperature warning/indicator
light (page 3-13)
8) ECO gauge (page 3-8)
– CONTINUED –
18
19
& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page 0
Mark Name Page / Brake system warning 3-17 Front fog light indicator 3-24
light light (if equipped)
Seatbelt warning light 3-10
Hill Holder indicator 3-19 Cruise control indicator 3-23
light light
Front passenger’s 3-10
seatbelt warning light Cruise control set indi-
Door open warning light 3-20 cator light 3-23
SRS airbag system 3-11
warning light Door open indicator
light 3-20 Headlight indicator light 3-24
CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/Malfunction in- 3-12 Low tire pressure
dicator lamp Low fuel warning light 3-19 warning light 3-15
Coolant temperature (U.S.-spec. models)
low indicator light/Cool- 3-13 All-Wheel Drive warn- Front passenger’s fron-
ant temperature high ing light (AT and CVT 3-20 / tal airbag ON indicator 1-46/
warning light models) light 3-12
20
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-15
Monitoring start delay time (after closure 0 second/30 seconds 30 seconds 2-17
of doors)
Impact sensor operation (only models Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-19
with shock sensors (dealer option))
Passive arming Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-18
Map light/Dome light/Cargo area light ON/OFF OFF 2-15
illumination
Remote keyless entry sys- Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-8
tem
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-10
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-7
Defogger and deicer system Rear window defogger, outside mirror Operation for 15 minutes/ Operation for 15 minutes 3-34
for models with the automatic defogger and windshield wiper deicer Continuous operation
climate control system
Map light/Dome light/Cargo Operation of map light/Dome light/Cargo OFF/Short/Normal/Long Long 6-2
area light area light OFF delay timer
Battery drainage prevention Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-6
function
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation 1-14
Auto on/off headlights Sensitivity of the operation of the auto on/ Low/Normal/High/Very high Normal 3-28
off headlights
for the child’s age, height and & Manual seat ! Reclining the seatback 1
weight.
! Forward and backward adjustment
Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seats) in the REAR seats at
all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi- WARNING
tions than in the front seating posi- Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to
tions. For instructions and precau- the desired position. Then release the To prevent the passenger from slid-
tions concerning child restraint sys- lever and try to move the seat back and ing under the seatbelt in the event of
tems, refer to “Child restraint sys- forth to make sure that it is securely locked a collision, always put the seatback
tems” F1-25. into place. in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
– CONTINUED –
! Driver’s seat the seat cushion angle or seat cushion ! Front passenger’s seat (if 1
height. equipped)
2) Seat cushion angle control switch
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control
switch.
3) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback,
move the control switch.
4) Seat height control switch
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
down the rear end of the control switch.
5) Lumbar support control switch
To increase lower back support, push the
front side of the switch. To decrease
lower back support, push the rear side of
the switch. 1) Seat position forward/backward con-
trol switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward.
2) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback,
move the control switch.
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
1) Head restraint event that the vehicle is struck
2) Release button from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
Both the driver’s seat and the front you must reinstall all head re-
passenger’s seat are equipped with head straints to protect vehicle occu-
restraints. pants.
The head restraint should be adjusted so . All occupants, including the dri-
that the center of the head restraint is ver, should not operate a vehicle
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears. or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
To raise: head restraints are placed in their
Pull the head restraint up. proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
To lower:
event of a crash.
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of 1) HIGH – Rapid heating
the seatback. 2) LOW – Normal heating
3) OFF – Off
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side
The seat heater operates when the igni- . Do not put anything on the seat Rear seats 1
tion switch is either in the “Acc” or “ON” which insulates against heat,
position. such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
To turn on the seat heater, press the
seat heater to overheat.
“LOW” or “HIGH” position on the switch,
as desired, depending on the tempera-
ture. NOTE
Selecting the “HIGH” position will cause Use of the seat heater for a long period
the seat to heat up quicker. of time while the engine is not running
To turn off the seat heater, slightly press can cause battery discharge.
the opposite side of the current position.
The indicator located on the switch illumi-
nates when the seat heater is in operation.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle, WARNING
be sure to turn the switch off.
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
CAUTION straint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. Do not
. There is a possibility that people put cushions or any other materials
with delicate skin may suffer between occupants and seatbacks
slight burns even at low tempera- or seat cushions. If you do so, the
tures if they use the seat heater risk of sliding under the lap belt and
for a long period of time. When of the lap belt sliding up over the
using the heater, always be sure abdomen will increase, and both can
to warn the persons concerned. result in serious internal injury or
death.
– CONTINUED –
& Reclining the seatback (Out- cargo area cover when you re-
back) cline the rear seat.
. Move the front cover of the cargo
area cover backward so that the
cover is not damaged by the
reclined seatback. Refer to “Car-
go area cover” F6-15.
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback WARNING
because it could tumble forward and
To prevent the passenger from slid-
injure passengers in the event of a
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
sudden stop or accident.
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the Pull the lever and adjust the seatback to
vehicle is in motion. the desired position.
Then release the lever and make sure the
seatback is securely locked into place.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is equipped with a
cargo area cover, observe the fol-
lowing precautions.
. Be careful not to pinch your hand
between the headrest and the
& Folding down the rear seat- move out from the cargo area, 1
back which could cause serious injury
or death.
WARNING . After returning the rear seat to its
original position, be certain to
. When you fold down the seat- place all of the seatbelts and the
back, check that there are no tab attached to the seat cushion
passengers or objects on the above the seat cushion. Also,
rear seat. Not doing so creates make certain that the shoulder
a risk of injury or property da- belts are fully visible.
mage if the seatback suddenly
folds down.
. Never allow passengers to ride CAUTION
1) Release lever
on the folded rear seatback or in
the cargo area or trunk. Doing so The rear seatback may fold down
quickly due to the internal spring. 2. Pull the release lever on the side that
may result in serious injury or you want to fold down.
death. Hold the seatback while pulling the
release lever to slow it down. 3. Fold the seatback down.
. Secure all objects and especially
long items properly to prevent To return the seatback to its original
them from being thrown around ! Legacy position, raise the seatback until it locks
inside the vehicle and causing To fold down the seatback, perform the into place and make sure that it is securely
serious injury during a sudden following procedure. locked.
stop, a sudden steering maneu- 1. Open the trunk lid. Refer to “Opening
ver or a rapid acceleration. the trunk lid (Legacy)” F2-9 or “To open
. When you return the seatback to the trunk lid from inside” F2-24.
its original position, shake the
seatback slightly to confirm that
it is securely fixed in place. If the
seatback is not securely fixed in
place, the seatback may sud-
denly fold down in the event of
sudden braking, or objects may
– CONTINUED –
! Outback & Head restraint adjustment ! Rear window side seating position
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head
restraints.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
Unlock the seatback by pulling the release you must reinstall all head re- 1) Head restraint
lever and then fold the seatback down. straints to protect vehicle occu- 2) Release button
pants.
To return the seatback to its original To raise:
position, raise the seatback until it locks . All occupants, including the dri-
Pull the head restraint up.
into place and make sure that it is securely ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the To lower:
locked.
head restraints are placed in their Push the head restraint down while
proper positions in order to mini- pressing the release button on the top of
mize the risk of neck injury in the the seatback.
event of a crash. To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is ! Rear center seating position 1
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
When the seats are not occupied, lower CAUTION
the head restraints to improve rearward
visibility. The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended posi-
tion.
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
NOTE Push the head restraint down while
For Legacy, it is not possible to remove pressing the release button on the top of
or install the head restraint without the seatback.
folding down the rear seatback. Fold To remove:
down the rear seatback and then A) When not used (retracted position) While pressing the release button, pull out
remove or install the head restraint. B) When used (extended position) the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
When the rear-center seating position is
occupied, raise the head restraint to the
– CONTINUED –
. Put children in the rear seat According to accident statistics, shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
1
properly restrained at all times. children are safer when properly securely place the lap belt as low as
The SRS airbag deploys with restrained in the rear seating possible on the hips and not on the child’s
considerable speed and force positions than in the front seat- waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
and can injure or even kill chil- ing positions. For instructions cannot be properly positioned, a child
dren, especially if they are not and precautions concerning the restraint system should be used. Never
restrained or improperly re- child restraint system, refer to place the shoulder belt under the child’s
strained. Because children are “Child restraint systems” F1-25. arm or behind the child’s back.
lighter and weaker than adults, ! Expectant mothers
their risk of being injured from Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
deployment is greater. Conse- sensing and diagnostic module, which will
quently, we strongly recommend record the use of the seatbelt by the front
that ALL children (including passenger when any of the SRS frontal,
those in child seats and those side and curtain airbags deploys.
that have outgrown child re-
! Infants or small children
straint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all Use a child restraint system that is
times in a child restraint device suitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Child
or in a seatbelt, whichever is restraint systems” F1-25.
appropriate for the child’s height ! Children
and weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint
Secure ALL types of child re- system, the child should sit in the rear seat
straint devices (including for- and be restrained using the seatbelts. Expectant mothers also need to use the
ward facing child seats) in the According to accident statistics, children seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
REAR seats at all times. are safer when properly restrained in the for specific recommendations. The lap belt
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD rear seating positions than in the front should be worn securely and as low as
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE seating positions. Never allow a child to possible over the hips, not over the waist.
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS stand up or kneel on the seat.
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE the face or neck, move the child closer to
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO the belt buckle to help provide a good
THE SRS AIRBAG.
– CONTINUED –
& Emergency Locking Retrac- When securing a child restraint system on belts by the warning lights in the locations
tor (ELR) the rear seats by using a seatbelt, the indicated in the following illustration and a
seatbelt must be changed over to the chime.
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
Locking Retractor (ELR). For instructions on how to install the child
The emergency locking retractor allows restraint system using a seatbelt, refer to
normal body movement but the retractor “Installing child restraint systems with A/
locks automatically during a sudden stop, ELR seatbelt” F1-28.
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor. When the child restraint system is re-
moved, make sure that the retractor is
& Automatic/Emergency Lock- restored to the Emergency Locking Re-
ing Retractor (A/ELR) tractor (ELR) mode by allowing the seat-
belt to retract fully.
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-
matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/
ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking
& Seatbelt warning light
Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
and chime Driver’s warning light
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/ NOTE
ELR has an additional locking mode, If your seatbelt warning device does
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) not operate as described in the follow-
mode”, intended to secure a child restraint ing, it may be out of order. Have the
system. device inspected and, if necessary,
The ALR mode functions as follows. repaired by the nearest SUBARU deal-
When the seatbelt is once drawn out er.
completely and is then retracted even Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in warning device at the driver’s and front
that position and the seatbelt cannot be passenger’s seat, as required by current
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks safety standards.
will be heard which indicate the retractor With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is position, this device reminds the driver Front passenger’s warning light
retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled and front passenger to fasten their seat-
and the ELR mode is restored.
! Operation operation that follows the 6-second again. For the adjusting procedure, refer
1
If the driver and/or front passenger have/ warning after turning ON the ignition to “Manual seat” F1-3 (models equipped
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when switch. When the ignition switch is with manual seats only).
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” turned ON next time, however, the
complete sequence of the warning If the seatbelt warning device for the front
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will passenger’s seat does not function cor-
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the operation resumes. For further details
about canceling the warning operation, rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri- front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will please contact your SUBARU dealer.
deactivated even when the front passen-
also sound simultaneously. If there is no passenger on the front ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning take the following actions.
NOTE device for the front passenger’s seat will . Ensure that no article is placed on the
. If the driver’s and/or front passen- be deactivated. The front passenger’s seat other than a child restraint system
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened occupant detection system monitors and the child occupant.
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning whether or not there is a passenger on
device operates as follows according . Ensure that there is no article left in the
the front passenger’s seat.
to the vehicle speed. seatback pocket.
– At speeds lower than approxi-
Observe the following precautions. Failure . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
to do so may prevent the device from sition and seatback of front passenger’s
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
functioning correctly or cause the device seat are locked into place securely by
The warning light(s) for unfastened
to fail. moving the seat back and forth. (Models
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
steady illumination and flashing at . Do not install any accessory such as a equipped with manual seats only)
15-second intervals. The chime will table or TV onto the seatback.
not sound. . Do not store a heavy load in the & Fastening the seatbelt
– At speeds higher than approxi- seatback pocket.
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to WARNING
The warning light(s) for unfastened place his/her hands or legs on the front
seatbelt(s) will alternate between passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to . Never use a belt that is twisted or
flashing and steady illumination at pull the seatback. reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
15-second intervals and the chime . Do not use front seats with their back-
will sound while the warning light(s) injury.
ward-forward position and seatback not
is/are flashing. being locked into place securely. If any of . Keep the lap belt as low as
. It is possible to cancel the warning them are not locked securely, adjust them possible on your hips. In a colli-
– CONTINUED –
until you hear a click. ! Adjusting the front seat shoulder WARNING 1
belt anchor height
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
– CONTINUED –
! Rear seatbelts (except rear center Push the button on the buckle.
seatbelt on Outback)
Before closing the door, make sure that
1. Sit well back in the seat. the belts are retracted properly to avoid
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the catching the belt webbing in the door.
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If ! Rear center seatbelt on Outback
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
– CONTINUED –
2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the “CENTER” on the left-hand side until it
retractor. clicks.
1. Insert a key or other hard pointed 2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.
Push the release button of the center object into the slot in the connector You should hold the webbing end and
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to (buckle) on the right-hand side and push guide it back into the retractor while it is
unfasten the seatbelt. it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in
disconnect from the buckle. the recess and then insert the connector
(tongue) plate into the slot.
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-
. Do not allow the retractor to roll oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid. belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The
up the seatbelt too quickly.
seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be
Otherwise, the metal tongue . Never attempt to make modifica- activated in the event of an accident
plates may hit against the trim, tions or changes that will prevent involving a moderate to severe frontal
resulting in damaged trim. the seatbelt from operating prop- collision.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up erly.
so that the tongue plates are The pretensioner sensor also serves as a
neatly stored. A hanging tongue SRS frontal airbag sensor. If the sensor
plate can swing and hit against detects a certain predetermined amount of
the trim during driving, causing force during a frontal collision, the front
damage to the trim. seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the
retractor to take up the slack so that the
belt more effectively restrains the front
seat occupant.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” . Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen- first turned to the “ON” position
position. ger’s side) . Continuous illumination of the
The following components are monitored . Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- warning light
ger’s side)
by the indicator. . Illumination of the warning light
. Front sub sensor (right-hand side) . Front passenger’s occupant detection while driving
system weight sensor
. Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
. Airbag control module (including im-
pact sensors [all models] and rollover
control module & System servicing
sensors [Outback]) . Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator WARNING
. Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
. All related wiring
. Frontal airbag module (front passen- . When discarding a seatbelt re-
ger’s side) WARNING tractor assembly or scrapping
. Center pillar impact sensor (right-hand the entire vehicle damaged by a
side) If the warning light exhibits any of collision, consult your SUBARU
. Center pillar impact sensor (left-hand the following conditions, there may dealer.
side) be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag . Tampering with or disconnecting
. Front door impact sensor (right-hand the system’s wiring could result
side) system. Immediately take your vehi-
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer in accidental activation of the
. Front door impact sensor (left-hand seatbelt pretensioner and/or air-
to have the system checked. Unless
side) bag or could make the system
checked and properly repaired, the
. Side airbag module (driver’s side) seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS inoperative, which may result in
. Side airbag module (front passenger’s airbags will operate improperly (e.g. serious injury. Do not use elec-
side) SRS airbags may inflate in a very trical test equipment on any
. Rear wheel house impact sensor (right- minor collision or not inflate in a circuit related to the seatbelt
hand side) severe collision), which may in- pretensioner and airbag sys-
tems. For required servicing of
. Rear wheel house impact sensor (left- crease the risk of injury.
the seatbelt pretensioner, consult
hand side) . Flashing or flickering of the warn- your nearest SUBARU dealer.
. Curtain airbag module (right-hand side) ing light
. Curtain airbag module (left-hand side) . No illumination of the warning
. Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side) light when the ignition switch is
– CONTINUED –
& Where to place a child re- installing a child restraint system. WARNING 1
straint system Some types of child restraints might not be
The following descriptions are SUBARU’s able to be secured firmly due to projection Put children in the rear seat properly
recommendations on where to place a of the seat cushion. restrained at all times. The SRS
child restraint system in your vehicle. In this seating position, you should use airbag deploys with considerable
only a child restraint system that has a speed and force and can injure or
bottom base that fits snugly against the even kill children, especially if they
contours of the seat cushion and can be are not restrained or improperly
securely retained using the seatbelt. restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
C: Rear seat, center seating position risk of being injured from deploy-
Installing a child restraint system is not ment is greater.
recommended, although the A/ELR seat- For that reason, be sure to secure
belt and an upper anchorage (tether ALL types of child restraint devices
anchorage) are provided in this position. (including forward facing child
Some types of child restraints might not be seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
able to be secured firmly due to projection You should choose a restraint de-
of the seat cushion. vice which is appropriate for the
In this seating position, you should use child’s age, height and weight. Ac-
A: Front passenger’s seat only a child restraint system that has a cording to accident statistics, chil-
You should not install a child restraint bottom base that fits snugly against the dren are safer when properly re-
system (including a booster seat) due to contours of the seat cushion and can be strained in the rear seating posi-
the hazard to children posed by the securely retained using the seatbelt. tions than in the front seating posi-
passenger’s airbag. tions.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating
positions
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency
Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and
lower anchorages (bars) are provided for
– CONTINUED –
! Installing a rearward facing child 6. Push and pull the child restraint
restraint system forward and side to side to check
that it is firmly secured in the center of the
seat.
Sometimes a child restraint can be more
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. firmly secured by pushing it down into the
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the seat cushion and then tightening the
retractor to change the retractor over from seatbelt.
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind properly functioning).
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by retracting the
seatbelt fully.
! Installing forward facing child re-
straint
8. To remove the child restraint system, 4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
press the release button on the seatbelt 5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
buckle and allow the belt to retract retractor to change the retractor over from
completely. The belt will return to the the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
ELR mode. to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
WARNING into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- retractor functions as ALR.
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT 1. Place the child restraint system in the
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO rear seating position.
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE or around the child restraint system
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE following the instructions provided by its
SRS AIRBAG. manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
& Installing a booster seat CAUTION following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
WARNING When you install a child restraint 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
system, follow the manufacturer’s until you hear a click. Take care not to
. Child restraint systems and seat- instructions supplied with it. After twist the seatbelt.
belts can become hot in a vehicle installing the child restraint system, Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
that has been closed up in sunny check to ensure that it is held across the center of child’s shoulder and
weather; they could burn a small securely in position. If it is not held that the lap belt is positioned as low as
child. Check the child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your possible on the child’s hips.
system before you place a child child suffering personal injury in the
in it. event of an accident may be in-
. Do not leave an unsecured child creased.
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
. Never place the shoulder belt & Installation of child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your 1
under the child’s arm or behind systems by use of lower and child suffering personal injury in the
the child’s back. If an accident tether anchorages (LATCH) event of an accident may be in-
occurs, this can increase the risk creased.
or severity of injury to the child. WARNING
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in Some types of child restraint systems can
order to provide full restraint. . Child restraint systems and seat- be installed on the rear seat of your
Loose fitting belts are not as belts can become hot in a vehicle vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
effective in preventing or redu- that has been closed up in sunny child restraint systems are secured to the
cing injury. weather; they could burn a small dedicated anchorages provided on the
child. Check the child restraint vehicle body.
. Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the child’s hips. A system before you place a child The lower and tether anchorages are
high-positioned lap belt will in- in it. sometimes referred to as the LATCH
crease the risk of sliding under . Do not leave an unsecured child system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
the lap belt and of the lap belt restraint system in your vehicle. CHildren).
sliding up over the abdomen, and Unsecured child restraint sys-
both can result in serious inter- tems can be thrown around in-
nal injury or death. side of the vehicle in a sudden
. Make sure the shoulder belt is stop, turn or accident; they can
positioned across the center of strike and injure vehicle occu-
child’s shoulder. Placing the pants as well as result in serious
shoulder belt over the neck may injuries or death to the child.
result in neck injury during sud-
den braking or in a collision.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
2. If your child restraint system is of a
tight and secure, the danger of your
flexible attachment type (which uses
child suffering personal injury in the
tether belts to connect the child restraint
event of an accident may be in-
1. While following the instructions sup- system properly to the lower anchorages),
creased.
plied by the child restraint system manu- while pushing the child restraint into the
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the seat cushion, pull both left and right lower
lower anchorages located at “ ” marks on tether belts up to secure the child restraint
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the system firmly by taking up the slack in the
hooks are connected, make sure the belt.
adjacent seatbelts are not caught. 3. Connect the top tether hook to the
tether anchorage and firmly tighten the
tether. For information on how to set the
top tether, refer to “Top tether anchorages”
F1-36.
! To hook the top tether restraint while pressing the release button.
1
Store the head restraint in the trunk. Avoid
CAUTION placing the head restraint in the passen-
ger compartment to prevent it from being
Always remove the head restraint thrown around in the passenger compart-
when mounting a child restraint ment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.
system with a top tether. Failure to
do so may prevent the top tether
from being fastened tightly.
! Legacy
1. Fold down the rear seatback for the
window side seating position. Refer to 4. Fasten the top tether hook of the child
“Folding down the rear seatback” F1-9. restraint system to the appropriate upper
anchorage.
5. Tighten the top tether securely.
! Outback
3. Open the cover flaps to use the
anchorages.
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
! Components 1
1) Front sub sensor (right-hand side) 5) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and 7) Airbag control module (including impact
2) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) OFF indicator sensor [all models] and rollover sensor
3) SRS airbag system warning light 6) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s [Outback])
4) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) side)
– CONTINUED –
WARNING WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in The SRS airbag deploys with con-
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys siderable speed and force. Occu-
WARNING with considerable force and can pants who are out of proper position
injure or even kill the child. when the SRS airbag deploys could
Never allow a child to stand up, or to suffer very serious injuries. Be-
kneel on the front passenger’s seat. cause the SRS airbag needs enough
The SRS airbag deploys with con- space for deployment, the driver
siderable force and can injure or should always sit upright and well
even kill the child. back in the seat as far from the
steering wheel as practical while
still maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your
. Do not spill liquid on the front passen- er immediately if the SRS airbag system ! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off warning light illuminates. OFF indicators
immediately. If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
. Do not remove or disassemble the front may affect the proper function of the
passenger’s seat. SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
. Do not install any accessory (such as Have your vehicle inspected at your
an audio amplifier) other than a genuine SUBARU dealer.
SUBARU accessory under the front pas-
senger’s seat. NOTE
. Do not place anything (shoes, umbrel- The front passenger’s SRS side airbag,
la, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat. SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pre-
tensioner are not controlled by the
. The front passenger’s seat must not be
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
used with the head restraint removed.
tem.
. Do not leave any articles on the front
passenger’s seat or the seatbelt tongue
and buckle engaged when you leave your ON or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator
vehicle. or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
. Do not place a magnet near the OFF indicator
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
. Do not use front seats with their back- and OFF indicators show you the status of
ward-forward position and seatback not the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them The indicators are located next to the
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to clock in the center portion of the dash-
“Manual seat” F1-3 (models equipped board.
with manual seats only). When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
passenger’s occupant detection system which time the system is checked. Follow-
have failed, the SRS airbag system ing the system check, both indicators turn
warning light will illuminate. Have the off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
system inspected by your SUBARU deal- indicators illuminates depending on the
– CONTINUED –
! If the front passenger’s frontal air- sition and seatback of front passenger’s despite the fact that the actions noted
bag ON indicator illuminates and the seat are locked into place securely by above have been taken, seat the child/
OFF indicator turns off even when moving the seat back and forth. (Models small adult in the rear seat and im-
an infant or a small child is in a child equipped with manual seats only) mediately contact your SUBARU dealer
restraint system (including booster for an inspection. Even if the system
seat) If the ON indicator still remains illuminated has passed the dealer inspection, it is
while the OFF indicator turns off after recommended that on subsequent trips
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” taking relevant corrective actions de-
position if the front passenger’s frontal the child/small adult always take the
scribed above, relocate the child restraint rear seat.
airbag ON indicator illuminates and the system to the rear seat and immediately
OFF indicator turns off even when an contact your SUBARU dealer for an Children who have outgrown a child
infant or a small child is in a child restraint inspection. restraint system should always wear the
system (including booster seat). Remove seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
the child restraint system from the seat. By NOTE is deactivated or activated.
referring to the child restraint manufac- When a child who has outgrown a child ! Conditions in which front passen-
turer’s recommendations as well as the restraint system or a small adult is ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
child restraint system installation proce- seated in the front passenger’s seat,
dures in “Child restraint systems” F1-25, The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
correctly install the child restraint system. will be activated for deployment upon
system may or may not activate the
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” impact when any of the following condi-
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
position and make sure that the front tions is met regarding the front passen-
depending on the occupant’s seating
passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator ger’s seat.
posture. If the front passenger’s SRS
turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates. frontal airbag is activated (the ON . When the seat is occupied by an adult.
indicator remains illuminated while . When a heavy article is placed on the
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated seat.
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the the OFF indicator turns off), take the
following actions. following actions.
When the front passenger’s seat is occu-
. Ensure that no article is placed on the . Ensure that no article is placed on pied by an adult, observe the following
seat other than the child restraint system the seat other than the occupant. precautions. Failure to do so may lessen
and the child occupant. . Ensure that there is no article left in the load on the front passenger’s seat,
the seatback pocket.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the deactivating the front passenger’s SRS
seatback pocket. If the ON indicator still remains illumi- frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat
. Ensure that the backward-forward po- nated while the OFF indicator turns off is occupied by an adult.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to . Ensure that there is no article, book,
lift the front passenger’s seat cushion shoe, or other object trapped under the
bag system. If you have any questions,
you may contact the following SUBARU
1
using his/her feet. seat, at the rear of the seat, or on the side distributors:
. Do not place any article under the front of the seat.
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article . Ensure that the backward-forward po- of Columbia>
from behind and under the seat. This may sition and seatback of front passenger’s
lift the seat cushion. seat are locked into place securely by Subaru of America, Inc.
. Do not squeeze any article between moving the seat back and forth. (Models Customer Dealer Services Department
the front passenger’s seat and side trim/ equipped with manual seats only) P.O. Box 6000
pillar, door or center console box. This . Next, turn the ignition switch to the Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
may lift the seat cushion. “ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
the system to complete self-checking.
! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF Following the system check, both indica- <Hawaii>
indicator illuminates and the ON tors turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii
indicator turns off even when the indicator should illuminate while the OFF 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,
front passenger’s seat is occupied indicator remains off. HI 96819
by an adult 808-839-2273
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
This can be caused by the adult incor- nated while the ON indicator remains off, <Guam>
rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat. ask the occupant to move to the rear seat Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” and immediately contact your SUBARU bile
position. Ask the front passenger to set dealer for an inspection.
the seatback to the upright position, sit up 491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,
straight in the center of the seat cushion, ! Effect vehicle modifications made Guam
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/ for persons with disabilities may 671-633-2698
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to have on SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system operation (U.S. only) <Puerto Rico>
the rearmost position. Turn the ignition
Trebol Motors
switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF Changing or moving any parts of the front
indicator remains illuminated while the ON seats, seat belts, front bumper, front side P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
indicator remains off, take the following frame, instrument panel, combination me- 00910
actions. ter, steering wheel, steering column, tire, 787-793-2828
. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” suspension or floor panel can affect the There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
position. operation of the SUBARU advanced air- tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
– CONTINUED –
in such an area, please contact the The SRS airbag can function only when After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-
SUBARU distributor or dealer from which the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s
you bought your vehicle. The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag vision is not obstructed. The time required
! Operation system is designed to determine the from detecting impact to the deflation of
activation or deactivation condition of the the SRS airbag after deployment is short-
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag er than the blink of an eye.
depending on the total load on the front Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal
passenger’s seat monitored by the front airbag deploys and the driver’s and front
passenger’s occupant detection system passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
weight sensor. For this reason, only the the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
driver’s SRS frontal airbag may deploy in pretensioners operate at the same time.
the event of a collision, but this does not
mean failure of the system. Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS
airbag would activate in a non-accident
If the front sub sensors inside both front situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag
fenders and the impact sensors in the will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision
airbag control module detect a predeter- and will not interfere with the driver’s
mined amount of force during a frontal ability to maintain control of the vehicle.
collision, the control module sends signals
to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,
module or both driver’s and front passen- fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and
ger’s modules) instructing the module(s) some smoke will be released. These
to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The occurrences are a normal result of the
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal deployment. This smoke does not indicate
airbags use dual stage inflators. The two a fire in the vehicle.
inflators of each airbag are triggered either
sequentially or simultaneously, depending CAUTION
on the severity of impact in the case of the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag and depending Do not touch the SRS airbag system
on the severity of impact and the total load components around the steering
on the seat in the case of the front wheel and dashboard with bare
1) Driver’s side passenger’s SRS frontal airbag. hands right after deployment. Doing
2) Passenger’s side so can cause burns because the
components can be very hot as a ! Examples of accident in which the ! Examples of the types of accidents 1
result of deployment. driver’s/driver’s and front passen- in which it is possible that the
ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most driver’s/driver’s and front passen-
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front likely deploy. ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de-
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de- ploy.
signed to deploy in the event of an
accident involving a moderate to severe
frontal collision. It is basically not designed
to deploy in lesser frontal impacts be-
cause the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
are basically not designed to deploy in
side or rear impacts or in roll-over acci-
dents because deployment of only the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags
would not help the occupant in those
situations. The driver’s and front passen-
A head-on collision against a thick con-
ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to
crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
function on a one-time-only basis.
mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
SRS airbag deployment depends on the only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
level of force experienced in the passen- driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
ger compartment during a collision. That airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
level differs from one type of collision to vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
another, and it may have no bearing on frontal impact similar in fashion and
the visible damage done to the vehicle magnitude to the collision described
itself. above.
– CONTINUED –
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s 1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole. 1
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur. 2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
– CONTINUED –
! Examples of the types of accidents to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the WARNING
in which the driver’s/driver’s and side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
front passenger’s SRS frontal side or roof, or if it is involved in a low- If the vehicle is damaged in an
airbag(s) will basically not deploy. speed frontal collision. accident but the SRS frontal airbag
does not deploy, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
. Never allow a child to kneel on
the front passenger’s seat facing
the side window or wrap his/her
arms around the front seat seat-
A hands-free microphone or
other accessory in such a loca-
preventing deployment of the cur-
tain airbags.
1
tion could be propelled through Before hanging clothing on the coat
the cabin with great force by the hooks, make sure there are no sharp
curtain airbag, or it could prevent objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-
correct deployment of the curtain ing directly on the coat hooks with-
airbag. In either case, the result out using hangers.
could be serious injuries.
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of the SRS side airbag
deployment, they could be pro-
pelled dangerously toward the
vehicle’s occupants and cause
WARNING
WARNING
injuries. Do not put any kind of cover or
. Do not attach a hands-free micro- Do not hang coat hangers or other clothes or other objects over either
phone or any other accessory to hard or pointed objects on the coat front seatback and do not attach
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear hooks. If such items were hanging labels or stickers to the front seat
pillar, the windshield, a side win- on the coat hooks during deploy- surface on or near the SRS side
dow, an assist grip, or any other ment of the SRS curtain airbags, airbag. They could prevent proper
cabin surface that would be near they could cause serious injuries by deployment of the SRS side airbag,
a deploying SRS curtain airbag. coming off the coat hooks and being reducing protection available to the
thrown through the cabin or by
– CONTINUED –
deployment. airbag are basically not designed to ! Examples of the types of accidents 1
After deployment, do not touch any deploy in frontal or rear impacts because in which the SRS curtain airbag will
part of the SRS curtain airbag the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain most likely deploy.
system (from the front pillar to the airbag deployment would not help the
part of the roof side over the rear occupant in those situations. Legacy models
seat). Doing so can cause burns Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
because the components can be airbag are designed to function on a one-
very hot as a result of deployment. time-only basis.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain ! Example of the type of accident in
airbag are designed to deploy in the event which the SRS side airbag will most
of an accident involving a moderate to likely deploy.
severe side impact collision. They are
basically not designed to deploy in a
lesser side impact.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deployment depend on the level of
force experienced in the passenger com- A severe side impact near the front seat or
partment during a side impact collision. the rear seat activates the SRS curtain
That level differs from one type of collision airbag.
to another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
For Outback models, the SRS curtain
airbags are also designed to deploy when A severe side impact near the front seat
the vehicle is in an extremely inclined activates the SRS side airbag.
state such as during a rollover. They are
basically not designed to deploy in a
lesser inclined state.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
– CONTINUED –
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side 1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface 1
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy (Outback). 2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
– CONTINUED –
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact. 1
to deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
Legacy models the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –
. Airbag control module (including im- . Front passenger’s occupant detection & SRS airbag system servicing
pact sensors [all models] and rollover control module
sensors [Outback]) . Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON WARNING
. Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) and OFF indicator
. Frontal airbag module (front passen- . All related wiring . When discarding an airbag mod-
ger’s side) ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
. Center pillar impact sensor (right-hand WARNING cle damaged by a collision, con-
side) sult your SUBARU dealer.
If the warning light exhibits any of . The SRS airbag has no user-
. Center pillar impact sensor (left-hand the following conditions, there may
side) serviceable parts. Do not use
be a malfunction in the seatbelt electrical test equipment on any
. Front door impact sensor (right-hand pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
side) circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. Immediately take your vehi- system. For required servicing of
. Front door impact sensor (left-hand cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer the SRS airbag, consult your
side) to have the system checked. Unless nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
. Side airbag module (driver’s side) checked and properly repaired, the ing with or disconnecting the
. Side airbag module (front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS system’s wiring could result in
side) airbags will operate improperly (e.g. accidental inflation of the SRS
. Rear wheel house impact sensor (right- SRS airbags may inflate in a very airbag or could make the system
hand side) minor collision or not inflate in a inoperative, which may result in
severe collision), which may in-
. Rear wheel house impact sensor (left- serious injury.
crease the risk of injury.
hand side)
. Curtain airbag module (right-hand side) . Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
. Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side) . No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
. Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-
first turned to the “ON” position
ger’s side)
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- . Continuous illumination of the
ger’s side) warning light
. Front passenger’s occupant detection . Illumination of the warning light
system weight sensor while driving
CAUTION nents of the SRS airbag system are & Precautions against vehicle 1
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU modification
If you need service or repair in areas parts.
indicated in the following list, have WARNING
the work performed by an author- NOTE
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air- In the following cases, contact your To avoid accidental activation of the
bag control module, impact sensors SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. system or rendering the system
and airbag modules are stored in . The front part of the vehicle was inoperative, which may result in
these areas. involved in an accident in which only serious injury, no modifications
. Under the center console the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both should be made to any components
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
. Inside each front fender frontal airbags did not deploy. This includes the following modifi-
. Steering wheel and column and . The pad of the steering wheel, the cations.
nearby areas cover over the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, or either roof side (from . Installation of custom steering
. Top of the dashboard on front wheels
passenger’s side and nearby the front pillar to a point over the rear
areas seat) is scratched, cracked, or other- . Attachment of additional trim
wise damaged. materials to the dashboard
. Each front seat and nearby area
. The center pillar, front door, rear . Installation of custom seats
. Inside each center pillar wheel house or rear sub frame, or an
. Replacement of seat fabric or
. Inside each front door area near these parts, was involved in
leather
. In each roof side (from the front an accident in which the SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not . Installation of additional fabric or
pillar to a point over the rear seat) leather on the front seat
deploy.
. Between the rear seat cushion . The fabric or leather of either front . Attachment of a hands-free mi-
and rear wheel house on each seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise crophone or any other accessory
side damaged. to a front pillar, a center pillar, a
. Under the rear center seat . The rear part of the vehicle was rear pillar, the windshield, a side
involved in an accident. window, an assist grip, or any
In the event that the SRS airbag is other cabin surface that would be
deployed, replacement of the system near a deploying SRS curtain
should be performed only by an author- airbag
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, bullbar, winches, snow
plow, skid/sump plate, etc.) other
than genuine SUBARU acces-
sory parts.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
Keys ..................................................................... 2-2 Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-16
Key number ........................................................ 2-2 If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system ............................................................ 2-16 2
Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-3
Security ID plate.................................................. 2-3 Arming the system ............................................ 2-16
Security indicator light ........................................ 2-4 Disarming the system ........................................ 2-18
Key replacement ................................................. 2-4 Valet mode ........................................................ 2-18
Passive arming .................................................. 2-18
Door locks ........................................................... 2-4
Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-19
Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-4
Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-19
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5
Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-6 Child safety locks .............................................. 2-20
Power door locking switches ............................. 2-7 Windows............................................................. 2-20
Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-7 Power window operation by driver ..................... 2-21
Power window operation by passengers............. 2-23
Remote keyless entry system ............................ 2-8
Initialization of power window ............................ 2-23
Locking the doors ............................................... 2-9
Unlocking the doors ............................................ 2-9 Trunk lid (Legacy) .............................................. 2-24
Opening the trunk lid (Legacy)............................. 2-9 To open and close the trunk lid from outside...... 2-24
Unlocking the rear gate (Outback)....................... 2-10 To open the trunk lid from inside........................ 2-24
Vehicle finder function........................................ 2-10 Internal trunk lid release handle ......................... 2-25
Sounding a panic alarm...................................... 2-10 Rear gate (Outback)........................................... 2-26
Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-10 Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-28
Replacing the battery ......................................... 2-11 Moonroof switches ............................................ 2-28
Replacing lost transmitters ................................. 2-12 Sun shade ......................................................... 2-29
Alarm system ..................................................... 2-15
System alarm operation...................................... 2-15
Keys and door locks. You can keep the trunk number plate attached to the key set.
and glove box locked when you leave your Write down the key number and keep it in
vehicle and valet key at a parking facility. another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement
CAUTION key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
vehicle.
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs To make replacement keys, the security ID
against your knees while you are is also needed. Refer to “Key replace-
driving, it could turn the ignition ment” F2-4.
switch from the “ON” position to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, thereby
stopping the engine.
1) Master key
& Key number
2) Submaster key
3) Valet key
4) Key number plate
5) Security ID plate
Three types of keys are provided for your
vehicle:
Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all
locks on your vehicle.
. Ignition switch
. Driver’s door
. Glove box 1) Key number plate
. Trunk lid (Legacy) 2) Security ID plate
The valet key fits only the ignition switch The key number is stamped on the key
Immobilizer vice may not cause harmful interfer- record of your key number in the
ence, and (2) this device must accept vehicle.
The immobilizer system is designed to any interference received, including
prevent an unauthorized person from interference that may cause undesired & Security ID plate
2
starting the engine. Only keys registered operation.
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
be used to operate your vehicle. Even if CAUTION
an unregistered key fits into the ignition
. Do not place the key under direct
switch and can be turned to the “START”
sunlight or anywhere it may
position, the engine will automatically stop
become hot.
after several seconds.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
Each immobilizer key contains a trans- gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
ponder in which the key’s ID code is immediately.
stored. When a key is inserted into the
. FCC WARNING
ignition switch and turned to the “ON”
Changes or modifications not
position, the transponder transmits the
expressly approved by the party
key’s ID code to the immobilizer system’s
responsible for compliance 1) Key number plate
receiver. If the transmitted ID code
could void the user’s authority 2) Security ID plate
matches the ID code registered in the
to operate the equipment.
immobilizer system, the system allows the The security ID is stamped on the security
engine to be started. Since the ID code is ID plate attached to the key set. Write
transmitted and acted upon almost in- NOTE down the security ID and keep it in
stantly, the immobilizer system does not To protect your vehicle from theft, another safe place, not in the vehicle.
impede normal starting of the engine. please pay close attention to the fol- This number is needed to make a replace-
If the engine does not start, pull out the lowing security precautions: ment key if you lose your key or lock it
key once before trying again. Refer to . Never leave your vehicle unattended inside the vehicle.
“Ignition switch” F3-3. with its keys inside. To make replacement keys, the key
This device complies with Part 15 of . Before leaving your vehicle, close all number is also needed. Refer to “Key
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC windows and lock the doors (all mod- replacement” F2-4.
Rules. Operation is subject to the els) and rear gate (Outback).
following two conditions: (1) This de- . Do not leave spare keys or any The security ID is also needed for
– CONTINUED –
replacement or repair of the engine control In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g. Door locks
unit, integrated unit, combination meter an imitation key), the security indicator
(all models) and security control unit light illuminates. & Locking and unlocking from
(Canada-spec. models). the outside
NOTE
& Security indicator light Even if the security indicator light
flashes irregularly or its fuse blows
(the light does not flash if its fuse is
blown), the immobilizer system will
function normally.
– CONTINUED –
& Battery drainage prevention lights do not turn off automatically. To turn off
function the lights, it is necessary that each door is
If a door or the rear gate (Outback) is not completely closed.
completely closed, the interior lights will The operational/non-operational setting of
remain illuminated as a result. However, this function can be changed by a
several lights are automatically turned off SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest
by the battery drainage prevention func- SUBARU dealer if you would like to
tion to prevent the battery from going change the setting.
dead. The following interior lights are
affected by this function. NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
Item Switch Automatically turning for this function is set as “operational”.
position off
1) Lock . When leaving the vehicle, please
Map lights OFF*1 Approximately 20 make sure that all doors and the rear
2) Unlock minutes later
gate (Outback) are completely closed.
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the Dome Approximately 20 . The battery drainage prevention
lights DOOR minutes later
lock lever rearward. To unlock the door function does not operate while the
from the inside, rotate the lock lever Ignition Approximately 20 key is in the ignition switch.
forward. switch light — minutes later
The red mark on the lock lever appears Door step — None*2
lights
when the door is unlocked.
Cargo area Approximately 20
Pull the inside door handle to open an light DOOR minutes later
unlocked door.
*1: The map lights can be controlled by the
Always make sure that all doors and the battery drainage prevention function only when
rear gate (Outback) are closed before the map light switches are in the OFF position
starting to drive. and the door interlock switch is in the DOOR
position. For the switch positions, refer to “Map
light” F6-2.
*2: The door step lights are not affected by the
battery drainage prevention function, so the
Power door locking switches doors from the outside using the power NOTE
door locking switches. . The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
& Key lock-in prevention func- . When leaving the vehicle, make sure 2
tion you are holding the key before locking
the doors.
This function prevents the doors from
being locked with the key still in the
ignition switch.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function operational
With the driver’s door open, the doors are
automatically kept unlocked even if the
front side of the power door locking switch
is pressed.
1) Lock
2) Unlock ! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function non-operational
All doors and the rear gate (Outback) can
be locked and unlocked by the power door . If the lock lever is turned to the rear
locking switches located at the driver’s (“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
side and the front passenger’s side doors. open and the driver’s door is then closed
with the lock lever in that position, the
To lock the doors, press the front side of driver’s door is locked.
the switch. . If the spare key is used to lock the
To unlock the doors, press the rear side of driver’s door from the outside of the
the switch. vehicle, the door is locked.
When you close the doors after you set This function’s operational/non-opera-
the door locks, the doors remain locked. tional setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
NOTE dealer for details.
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
Remote keyless entry system could void the user’s authority to tance will be shorter in areas near a
operate the equipment. facility or electronic equipment emitting
strong radio waves such as a power plant,
CAUTION This device complies with Part 15 of broadcast station, TV tower, or remote
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC controller of home electronic appliances.
. Do not expose the remote trans- Rules. Operation is subject to the
mitter to severe shocks, such as following two conditions: (1) This de- NOTE
those experienced as a result of vice may not cause harmful interfer- The remote keyless entry system does
dropping or throwing. ence, and (2) this device must accept not operate when the key is inserted in
. Do not take the remote transmit- any interference received, including the ignition switch.
ter apart except when replacing interference that may cause undesired
the battery. operation.
. Do not get the remote transmitter The transmitter for the remote keyless
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with entry system is located inside the key
a cloth immediately. head.
. When you carry the remote trans-
The remote keyless entry system has the
mitter on an airplane, do not
following functions.
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane. . Locking and unlocking the doors (and
When any button of the remote rear gate (Outback)) without a key
transmitter is pressed, radio . Opening the trunk lid (Legacy) without
waves are sent and may affect key
the operation of the airplane. . Sounding a panic alarm
: Trunk lid/rear gate unlock button
When you carry the remote trans- . Arming and disarming the alarm sys- : Unlock/disarm button
mitter in a bag on an airplane, tem. For detailed information, refer to : Lock/arm button
take measures to prevent the “Alarm system” F2-15. A: Panic button
buttons of the remote transmitter
from being pressed. The operable distance of the remote
keyless entry system is approximately 30
. FCC WARNING feet (10 meters). However, this distance
Changes or modifications not will vary depending on environmental
expressly approved by the party conditions. The system’s operable dis-
responsible for compliance
& Locking the doors & Unlocking the doors & Opening the trunk lid
(Legacy)
2
Press the “ ” button to lock all doors and Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s
rear gate (Outback). An electronic chirp door. An electronic chirp will sound twice The trunk lid opens when the “ ” button
will sound once and the turn signal lights and the turn signal lights will flash twice. is pressed continuously for at least 2
will flash once. To unlock all doors and the rear gate seconds. An electronic chirp will sound
If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk (Outback), briefly press the “ ” button a twice and the turn signal lights will flash
lid) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp second time within 5 seconds. twice.
will sound five times and the turn signal
lights will flash five times to alert you that NOTE
the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) are If the interval between the first and
not properly closed. When you close the second presses of the “ ” button (for
door, it will automatically lock and then an unlocking of all of the doors and the
electronic chirp will sound once and the rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-
turn signal lights will flash once. tem may not respond.
– CONTINUED –
& Unlocking the rear gate NOTE & Selecting audible signal op-
(Outback) If the interval between presses is too eration
short when you press the “ ” button Using an electronic chirp, the system will
three times, the system may not re- give you an audible signal when the doors
spond to the signals from the remote lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
transmitter. the audible signal off.
To deactivate the audible signal, perform
& Sounding a panic alarm the following procedure. You can also use
the same steps to restore the function.
1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors and the rear gate.
2. Press the unlock side of the power
door locking switch.
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch.
Pressing the “ ” button unlocks the rear 4. While holding down the unlock side of
gate. the power door locking switch, pull the key
out and re-insert it into the ignition switch
An electronic chirp will sound twice and
at least 5 times within 10 seconds after
the turn signal lights will flash twice.
performing step 2.
5. Open and close the driver’s door
& Vehicle finder function within 10 seconds after performing step 4.
Use this function to find your vehicle To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
button once. 6. To indicate completion of the setting,
parked among many vehicles in a large the turn signal lights flash 3 times and the
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet The horn will sound and the turn signal chirp sounds 3 times.
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “ ” lights will flash.
button three times in a 5-second period To deactivate the panic alarm, press any You may have the above procedure
will cause your vehicle’s horn to sound button on the remote transmitter. If a performed by your SUBARU dealer.
once and its turn signal lights to flash three button on the remote transmitter is not
times. pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
after approximately 30 seconds.
CAUTION 2
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the transmitter when repla-
cing the battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the trans-
mitter when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
swallow them. 3. Remove the transmitter case from the
1. Remove the screw on the key head. key head.
. There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of bat-
tery.
. Batteries should not be exposed
to excessive heat such as sun-
shine, fire or the like.
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
The alarm is triggered by: 1 second, and wait 10 seconds without & Arming the system
. Opening a door, the rear gate or trunk releasing the switch. The setting will then
lid be changed as follows: ! To arm the system using remote
transmitter
. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as If the system was previously activated:
forced entry (only models with shock 1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
The trip meter screen displays “AL oF” equipped).
sensors (dealer option))
and the horn sounds twice, indicating that
the system is now deactivated. 2. Remove the key from the ignition
NOTE switch.
The alarm system can be set to trigger If the system was previously deacti-
vated: 3. Open the doors and get out of the
illumination of map lights and dome vehicle.
light. The map lights and dome light The trip meter screen displays “AL on” and
the horn sounds once, indicating that the 4. Make sure that the engine hood (and
notification is deactivated as the fac- the trunk lid (Legacy)) are locked.
tory setting. Refer to “Function set- system is now activated.
tings” F20. A SUBARU dealer can 5. Close all doors (and the rear gate
activate the system. Contact your NOTE (Outback)).
SUBARU dealer for details. You may have the above setting
change done by your SUBARU dealer.
& Activating and deactivating & If you have accidentally trig-
the alarm system gered the alarm system
To change the setting of your vehicle’s
alarm system for activation or deactiva- ! To stop the alarm
tion, do the following. Perform any of the following operations.
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to . Press any button on the remote trans-
“Disarming the system” F2-18. mitter.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all . Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
doors (and the rear gate (Outback)). position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” : Press to Arm the system.
position. : Press to Disarm the system.
4. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
of the driver’s power door locking switch,
open the driver’s door within the following
“LOCK” position and remove the key from ! Disarming the system causes the horn to sound and the turn
the ignition switch. To disarm the system, briefly press the signal lights to flash for a short time when
3. Open the doors and get out of the “ ” button on the transmitter. the sensed impact is weak, but it warns of
vehicle. a strong impact or multiple impacts by 2
& Tripped sensor identification sounding the horn and flashing the turn
The security indicator light flashes when signal lights, both lasting approximately 30
the alarm system has been triggered. seconds.
Also, the number of flashes indicates the If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can
location of unauthorized intrusion or the connect them and set them for activation
severity of impact on the vehicle. or deactivation.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the indicator light will
NOTE
illuminate for 1 second and then flash as . The shock sensors are not always
follows: able to sense impacts caused by break-
. When a door or rear gate (Outback) ing in, and cannot sense an impact that
was opened: 5 times does not cause vibration (such as
breaking the glass using a rescue
. When the trunk (Legacy) was opened: hammer).
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors 4 times
with the inside door lock levers. . The shock sensors may sense vi-
. When a strong impact or multiple bration like those shown in the follow-
5. Close the doors. The system will impacts were sensed: twice (only models ing and trigger the alarm system.
automatically arm after 1 minute. with shock sensors (dealer option)) Select the settings of the alarm system
In the passive mode, the system can also . When a light impact was sensed: once and shock sensors appropriately de-
be armed with the remote transmitter or (only models with shock sensors (dealer pending on where you usually park
with the power door locking switches. If option)) your vehicle.
the remote transmitter or power door Examples:
locking switch is used to lock the vehicle, & Shock sensors (dealer op- – Vibration from construction site
arming will take place immediately regard- tion) – Vibration in multistory car park
less of whether or not the passive mode The shock sensors trigger the alarm – Vibration from trains
has been selected. system when they sense impacts applied . You can have the sensitivity of the
to the vehicle and when any of their shock sensors adjusted to your pre-
electric wires is cut. The alarm system ference by your SUBARU dealer.
WARNING WARNING
Always turn the child safety locks to To avoid serious personal injury
the “LOCK” position when children caused by entrapment, always con-
sit on the rear seat. Serious injury form to the following instructions
could result if a child accidentally without exception.
opens the door and falls out. . When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
neck, head or other objects from
being caught in the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
Each rear door has a child safety lock that result in injury to a child operat-
prevents the door from being opened even ing the power window.
if the inside door handle is pulled.
The power windows operate only when
When the child safety lock lever is in the the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
“LOCK” position, the door cannot be
opened from inside regardless of the
position of the inner door handle lock
lever. The door can only be opened from
& Power window operation by ! Operating the driver’s window For some models, this switch also has a
driver one-touch auto up function that allows the
window to be closed fully without holding
! Driver’s side power window the switch. 2
switches Pull the switch up until it clicks and release
it, and the window will fully close. To stop
the window halfway, press the switch
down lightly.
NOTE
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected
due to situations such as battery or
fuse replacement, the one-touch auto
up/down function is deactivated. Initi-
1) Automatically open/close alize the power window to reactivate
2) Open/close the one-touch auto up/down function.
Refer to “Initialization of power win-
To open: dow” F2-23.
1) Lock switch Press the switch down lightly and hold it.
2) For driver’s window The window will open as long as the ! Anti-entrapment function
3) For front passenger’s window switch is held.
4) For rear left passenger’s window This switch also has a one-touch auto CAUTION
5) For rear right passenger’s window down function that allows the window to
be opened fully without holding the switch. . Never attempt to test this func-
All door windows can be controlled by the tion using fingers, hands or other
power window switch cluster at the driver Press the switch down until it clicks and
parts of your body.
side door. release it, and the window will fully open.
To stop the window halfway, pull the . The anti-entrapment function
switch up lightly. may not operate properly if some
object gets trapped just before
To close: the window fully closes.
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The
window will close as long as the switch is
held.
– CONTINUED –
& Power window operation by ! Operating the windows & Initialization of power win-
passengers dow
! Passenger’s side power window If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected due 2
switches to situations such as battery or fuse
replacement, the following functions are
deactivated.
. One-touch auto up/down function
. Anti-entrapment function
Initialize the power window in the following
procedure to reactivate such functions.
1. Close the driver’s door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
To open:
3. Open the driver’s side window halfway
Press the switch down and hold it until the
by pushing down the power window
window reaches the desired position.
switch.
To close:
Each passenger window can be controlled 4. Pull up the power window switch and
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
by the power window switch located on close the window completely. Continue
window reaches the desired position.
the door. pulling up the switch for approximately 1
When the lock switch on the power second after the window is closed com-
window switch cluster, located on the pletely.
driver’s side door, is in the lock position,
the passengers’ windows cannot be oper-
ated with the passengers’ switches.
Trunk lid (Legacy) trunk lid down until the latch engages. ! To lock and unlock the trunk lid
opener switch
NOTE
WARNING . Do not leave your valuables in the
trunk when you leave your vehicle.
. To prevent dangerous exhaust . Even when the trunk lid cannot be
gas from entering the vehicle, opened using the remote keyless entry
always keep the trunk lid closed system, you can open the trunk lid by
while driving. using the key. Refer to “Trunk lid
. Help prevent children, adults or (Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot be
animals from locking themselves opened” F9-18.
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the & To open the trunk lid from
trunk could quickly become high inside
enough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including When you entrust your vehicle key to
brain damage to anyone locked another person, you can lock the trunk lid
inside, particularly for small chil- opener switch to prevent items in the trunk
dren. from being stolen.
. When leaving the vehicle, close To lock the trunk lid opener switch, per-
all windows and lock all doors. form the following procedure.
Also make certain that the trunk 1. Open the glove box. Refer to “Glove
is closed. box” F6-6.
2. Press the trunk lid opener lock button.
& To open and close the trunk To unlock the trunk lid opener switch,
lid from outside perform the same procedure again.
The trunk lid can be opened using the Press the trunk lid opener switch for more
remote keyless entry system. Refer to than 1 second.
“Opening the trunk lid (Legacy)” F2-9.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the
CAUTION
. Do not close the lid while grip-
ping the release handle. The
handle may be damaged.
. Do not use the handle as a hook
to fasten straps or ropes to
secure your cargo in the trunk. 2. Use a flat-head screwdriver with a thin
Such use may result in damage blade. Slide the flat-head screwdriver
of the handle. blade from the slit aperture of the lock
assembly fully to the end until you hear a
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk, . Load the trunk so that cargo
click.
pull the yellow handle as indicated by the cannot strike the release handle.
arrow on the handle. This operation If the cargo hits the handle while
unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the the vehicle is being driven, the
lid. handle may be pulled and the
trunk lid may open. That may
The handle is made of material that
cause cargo to fall out of the
remains luminescent for approximately
trunk, which could create a traffic
an hour in the dark trunk space after it is
safety hazard.
exposed to ambient light even for a short
time.
– CONTINUED –
WARNING NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due
. To prevent dangerous exhaust to a discharged vehicle battery, a
gas from entering the vehicle, malfunction in the door locking/unlock- 2
always keep the rear gate closed ing system or other causes, you can
while driving. unlock it by manually operating the
. Do not attempt to shut the rear rear gate lock release lever. For the
gate while holding the recessed procedure, refer to “Rear gate (Out-
grip. Also avoid closing the rear back) – if the rear gate cannot be
gate by pulling on the recessed unlocked” F9-19.
grip from inside the cargo space.
There is a danger of your hand
being caught and injured.
To close:
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down
firmly until the latch engages. CAUTION
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
pull it down holding the recessed grip. . Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when open-
ing or closing the rear gate and
when loading or unloading car-
go.
Moonroof (if equipped) . Never try to check the anti-en- & Moonroof switches
trapment function by deliberately
placing part of your body in the ! Tilting moonroof
WARNING moonroof.
Never let anyone’s hands, arms,
head or any objects protrude from CAUTION
the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if the vehicle stops . Do not sit on the edge of the open
suddenly or turns sharply or if the moonroof.
vehicle is involved in an accident. . Do not operate the moonroof if
To avoid serious personal injury falling snow or extremely cold
caused by entrapment, you must conditions have caused it to
conform to the following instruc- freeze shut.
tions without exception. . The anti-entrapment function
. Before closing the moonroof, does not operate when the moon-
roof is being tilted down. Be sure 1) Raise
make sure that no one’s hands,
to confirm that it is safe to do so 2) Lower
arms, head or other objects will
be accidentally caught in the before tilting the moonroof down. The raising function will only operate when
moonroof. the moonroof is fully closed. The lowering
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- The moonroof has both tilting and sliding function will only operate when the moon-
ways remove the key from the functions. roof is raised.
ignition switch for safety and The moonroof operates only when the Press the rear side of the “UP/DOWN”
never allow an unattended child ignition switch is in the “ON” position. switch to raise the moonroof.
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
Press the front side of the “UP/DOWN”
to follow this procedure could
switch to lower the moonroof.
result in injury to a child operat-
ing the moonroof. Release the switch after the moonroof has
been raised or has been lowered com-
pletely. Pressing the switch continuously
may cause damage to the moonroof.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Black plate (5,1)
Ignition switch ..................................................... 3-3 AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT and CVT
LOCK.................................................................. 3-3 models) ........................................................... 3-15
Acc..................................................................... 3-4 Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.
ON...................................................................... 3-4 models) ........................................................... 3-15
START ................................................................ 3-4 ABS warning light.............................................. 3-16 3
Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-4 Brake system warning light................................ 3-17
Ignition switch light ............................................. 3-4 Hill Holder indicator light ................................... 3-19
Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-19
Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-5
Door open warning light .................................... 3-20
Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-5 Door open indicator light ................................... 3-20
Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-5 Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 3-20
Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT and CVT
movement upon turning on the ignition models) ........................................................... 3-20
switch............................................................... 3-5
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
Speedometer....................................................... 3-6 Dynamics Control operation indicator light ....... 3-20
Odometer............................................................ 3-6 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 3-22
Double trip meter ................................................ 3-6 Security indicator light....................................... 3-22
Tachometer ......................................................... 3-7 Select lever/gear position indicator..................... 3-22
Fuel gauge.......................................................... 3-7 Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-23
ECO gauge ......................................................... 3-8 High beam indicator light ................................... 3-23
Warning and indicator lights .............................. 3-9 Cruise control indicator light.............................. 3-23
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-10 Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 3-23
SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-11 Headlight indicator light ..................................... 3-24
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF Front fog light indicator light (if equipped).......... 3-24
indicators......................................................... 3-12
Clock .................................................................. 3-24
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator lamp .................................................. 3-12 Multi function display ........................................ 3-25
Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-25
temperature high warning light ......................... 3-13 Average fuel consumption ................................. 3-26
Charge warning light .......................................... 3-14 Current fuel consumption .................................. 3-26
Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-14 Driving range on remaining fuel ......................... 3-27
Engine low oil level warning light ....................... 3-14
Light control switch ........................................... 3-27 Defogger and deicer .......................................... 3-34
Headlights.......................................................... 3-28 Mirrors ................................................................ 3-36
High/low beam change (dimmer)......................... 3-28 Type A inside mirror (if equipped) ...................... 3-36
Headlight flasher ................................................ 3-29 Type B inside mirror (if equipped) ...................... 3-36
Daytime running light system ............................. 3-29 Auto-dimming mirror with compass
Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-29 (if equipped) .................................................... 3-44
Illumination brightness control ......................... 3-30 Auto-dimming mirror with compass and
HomeLink® (if equipped)................................... 3-45
Front fog light switch (if equipped) .................. 3-30
Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-51
Wiper and washer .............................................. 3-31
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ........................... 3-52
Windshield wiper and washer switches ............... 3-32
Rear window wiper and washer switch Horn .................................................................... 3-52
(Outback) ......................................................... 3-34
Ignition switch tion to the “Acc” or “LOCK” posi- . If the ignition switch will not move
tion, thereby stopping the engine. from the “LOCK” position to the “Acc”
Also, if the key is attached to a position, turn the steering wheel
WARNING keyholder or to a large bunch of slightly to the left and right as you turn
other keys, centrifugal force may act the ignition switch.
. Never turn the ignition switch to on it as the vehicle moves, resulting 3
“LOCK” while the vehicle is in unwanted turning of the ignition & LOCK
being driven or towed because switch.
that will lock the steering wheel, The key can only be inserted or removed
preventing steering control. And in this position. The ignition switch will lock
The ignition switch has four positions:
when the engine is turned off, it the steering wheel when you remove the
LOCK, Acc, ON and START.
takes a much greater effort than key.
usual to steer. If turning the key is difficult, turn the
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- steering wheel slightly to the right and left
ways remove the key from the as you turn the key.
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows, the moon-
roof or other controls or even
make the vehicle move.
NOTE
CAUTION . Keep the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position when the engine is
Do not attach a large key holder or not running. The key can be turned from “Acc” to
key case to either key. If it banged . Using electrical accessories for a “LOCK” only when the key is pushed in
against your knees or hands while long time with the ignition switch in the while turning it (all models) and the select
you are driving, it could turn the “ON” or “Acc” position can cause the lever is in the “P” position (AT and CVT
ignition switch from the “ON” posi- battery to go dead. models).
– CONTINUED –
The display can be switched as shown in the “ON” position. Change the setting trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn
the following illustration by pressing the when the ignition switch is in the off.
trip knob. “LOCK” or “Acc” position. Also, if you open and close the driver’s
door within 10 seconds of illumination of
& Speedometer the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
The speedometer shows the vehicle meter will turn off.
speed.
& Double trip meter
& Odometer
& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
*1: “ ” or “ ” and “ ” or “ ” cannot zone. In this range, fuel injection will
be displayed when the ignition switch is be cut by the engine control module 1) Low fuel warning light
in the “ON” position. to protect the engine from overrev-
ving. The engine will resume run- The fuel gauge shows the approximate
*2: MT models only amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
ning normally after the engine speed
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A is reduced below the red zone. When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”
trip or B trip meter by pressing the knob or “Acc” position, the fuel gauge shows “E”
and keep the knob pressed for more than even if the fuel tank contains fuel.
2 seconds.
– CONTINUED –
The gauge may move slightly during gauge. & ECO gauge
braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel This indicates that the fuel filler door
level movement in the tank. (lid) is located on the right side of the
If you press the trip knob while the ignition vehicle.
switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,
the fuel gauge’s dial will light up and the ! Low fuel warning light
needle will indicate the amount of fuel The low fuel warning light illuminates
remaining in the tank. when the fuel tank is nearly empty. It only
If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating operates when the ignition switch is in the
the amount of fuel remaining in the tank, “ON” position. When this light illuminates,
you (a) do not press the trip knob for 10 fill the fuel tank immediately.
seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s
door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the CAUTION
“E” position and the dial and needle will
Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
turn off. 1) U.S.-spec. models
ever the low fuel warning light
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
NOTE illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause The ECO gauge shows the difference
damage to the engine. between the average rate of fuel con-
sumption and the current rate of fuel
consumption. Using the average rate of
NOTE fuel consumption since the trip meter was
. The low fuel warning light illumi- last reset, the indicator needle behaves as
nates when the remaining amount of described in the following items.
fuel in the tank has reached approxi-
mately 2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 Imp gal). U.S.-spec. models:
. The low fuel warning light does not If the current rate of fuel consumption is
turn off unless the tank is replenished lower than the average rate of fuel
up to a fuel quantity of approximately consumption, the indicator needle points
4.0 US gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal). to the “+” side. If the current rate of fuel
consumption is higher than the average
rate of fuel consumption, the indicator
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel needle points to the “−” side. When the
indicator needle is pointing to the “+” side, Warning and indicator lights : Oil pressure warning light
it indicates fuel-efficient driving.
: Engine low oil level warning light
Except U.S.-spec. models: Several of the warning and indicator lights
If the current rate of fuel consumption is illuminate momentarily and then go out : Windshield washer fluid warning light
when the ignition switch is initially turned
lower than the average rate of fuel
consumption, the indicator needle points to the “ON” position. This permits check- : AT OIL TEMP warning light 3
ing the operation of the bulbs. (AT and CVT models)
to the “−” side. If the current rate of fuel
consumption is higher than the average Apply the parking brake and turn the / : ABS warning light
rate of fuel consumption, the indicator ignition switch to the “ON” position. The
following lights illuminate: : Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
needle points to the “+” side. When the light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
indicator needle is pointing to the “−” side, : Seatbelt warning light tion indicator light
it indicates fuel-efficient driving. (The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the driver fastens the : Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-
NOTE tor light
seatbelt.)
. The ECO gauge shows only an
approximate indication. : Front passenger’s seatbelt warning / : Brake system warning light
. After resetting the trip meter, the light : Hill Holder indicator light
average rate of fuel consumption is not (The seatbelt warning light turns off
shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km). only when the front seat passenger : All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT and
Until that time, the ECO gauge does not fastens the seatbelt.) CVT models)
operate. : Low tire pressure warning light
: SRS airbag system warning light
(U.S.-spec. models)
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator light : Low fuel warning light
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag : Door open warning light
OFF indicator light : Door open indicator light
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- : Cruise control indicator light
function indicator lamp
: Cruise control set indicator light
: Coolant temperature high warning light
: Select lever/gear position indicator
: Charge warning light
– CONTINUED –
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a The warning light(s) for unfastened
burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the seatbelt(s) will alternate between
corresponding system. steady illumination and flashing at
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer 15-second intervals. The chime will
for repair. not sound.
– At speeds higher than approxi-
& Seatbelt warning light mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
and chime The warning light(s) for unfastened
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt seatbelt(s) will alternate between
warning device at the driver’s and front flashing and steady illumination at
passenger’s seat, as required by current 15-second intervals and the chime
safety standards. will sound while the warning light(s)
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON” is/are flashing.
position, this device reminds the driver
Front passenger’s warning light . It is possible to cancel the warning
operation that follows the 6-second
and front passenger to fasten their seat- ! Operation
belts by the warning lights in the locations warning after turning ON the ignition
If the driver and/or front passenger have/ switch. When the ignition switch is
indicated in the following illustration and a has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when
chime. turned ON next time, however, the
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” complete sequence of the warning
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will operation resumes. For further details
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the about canceling the warning operation,
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri- please contact your SUBARU dealer.
ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will
also sound simultaneously. If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
NOTE device for the front passenger’s seat will
. If the driver’s and/or front passen- be deactivated. The front passenger’s
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened occupant detection system monitors
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning whether or not there is a passenger on
device operates as follows according the front passenger’s seat.
to the vehicle speed. Observe the following precautions. Failure
– At speeds lower than approxi- to do so may prevent the device from
Driver’s warning light mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
functioning correctly or cause the device seat are locked into place securely by airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
to fail. moving the seat back and forth. (Models SRS airbags may inflate in a very
. Do not install any accessory such as a equipped with manual seats only) minor collision or not inflate in a
table or TV onto the seatback. severe collision), which may in-
If still the seatbelt warning device for front
. Do not store a heavy load in the crease the risk of injury.
seatback pocket.
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
. Flashing or flickering of the warn- 3
rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to tions described above, immediately con- ing light
place his/her hands or legs on the front tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec- . No illumination of the warning
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to tion. light when the ignition switch is
pull the seatback. first turned to the “ON” position
. Do not use front seats with their back- & SRS airbag system . Continuous illumination of the
ward-forward position and seatback not warning light warning light
being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them When the ignition switch is turned to the . Illumination of the warning light
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to “ON” position, the SRS airbag system while driving
“Manual seat” F1-3 (models equipped warning light will illuminate for approxi-
with manual seats only). mately 6 seconds and turn off. This shows
the SRS frontal airbag and SRS side
If the seatbelt warning device for the front airbag and SRS curtain airbag and seat-
passenger’s seat does not function cor- belt pretensioners are in normal operation.
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is WARNING
deactivated even when the front passen-
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), If the warning light exhibits any of
take the following actions. the following conditions, there may
. Ensure that no article is placed on the be a malfunction in the seatbelt
seat other than a child restraint system pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
and its child occupant. system. Immediately take your vehi-
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
to have the system checked. Unless
seatback pocket.
checked and properly repaired, the
. Ensure that the backward-forward po- seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
– CONTINUED –
& Front passenger’s frontal indicators illuminates depending on the tion without having the emission
airbag ON and OFF indica- status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal control system checked and re-
tors airbag determined by the SUBARU ad- paired as necessary could cause
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring. serious damage, which may not be
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
indicator will remain off. while the engine is running, it may indicate
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag that there is a problem or potential
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal problem somewhere in the emission con-
airbag ON indicator will remain off while trol system.
the OFF indicator will illuminate. ! If the light illuminates constantly
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON” If the light illuminates constantly while
position, if both the ON and OFF indica- driving or does not turn off after the engine
tors remain illuminated or off simulta- starts, an emission control system mal-
neously even after the system check function has been detected.
ON or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON period, the system is malfunctioning.
indicator Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi- You should have your vehicle checked by
or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ately for an inspection. an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
OFF indicator ately.
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON & CHECK ENGINE warn- NOTE
and OFF indicators show you the status of ing light/Malfunction This light also illuminates when the fuel
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag. indicator lamp filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
The indicators are located next to the If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
clock in the center portion of the dash- CAUTION
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
board. light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
When the ignition switch is turned to the malfunction indicator lamp illumi- could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF nates while you are driving, have Remove the cap and retighten it until it
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during your vehicle checked/repaired by clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering
which time the system is checked. Follow- your SUBARU dealer as soon as with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the
ing the system check, both indicators turn possible. Continued vehicle opera- cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
warning light/malfunction indicator lamp & Coolant temperature Safely stop the vehicle as
turn off immediately. It may take several low indicator light/Cool- soon as possible, and refer
driving trips. If the light does not turn off, ant temperature high to the emergency steps for the
take your vehicle to your authorized case of engine overheating.
SUBARU dealer immediately.
warning light
After that, have the system
! If the light is blinking CAUTION checked by your nearest 3
SUBARU dealer. Refer to “En-
If the light is blinking while driving, an
. After turning the ignition switch gine overheating” F9-12.
engine misfire condition has been de-
tected which may damage the emission to the “ON” position, if this – Blinking in RED and BLUE
control system. indicator light/warning light be- alternately:
haves under any of the following The electrical system may be
To prevent serious damage to the emis-
conditions, the electrical system malfunctioning. Contact your
sion control system, you should conform
may be malfunctioning. Contact SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
to the following instructions.
your SUBARU dealer immedi- tion.
. Reduce vehicle speed. ately for an inspection.
. Avoid hard acceleration.
– It remains blinking in RED. This coolant temperature low indicator
. Avoid steep uphill grades. light/coolant temperature high warning
– It remains illuminated in RED
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi- light has the following three functions.
for more than 2 seconds.
ble. . Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi-
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as – It remains blinking in RED and cient warming up of the engine
BLUE alternately.
possible. . Blinking in RED indicates that the
. While driving, if this indicator engine is close to overheating
The CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal- light/warning light behaves under
function indicator lamp may stop blinking . Illumination in RED indicates overheat-
any of the following conditions, ing condition of the engine
and illuminate steadily after several driv- take the specified appropriate
ing trips. You should have your vehicle measure listed below. For the system check, this indicator light/
checked by an authorized SUBARU deal-
– Blinking in RED: warning light illuminates in RED for
er immediately. approximately 2 seconds when the igni-
Decelerate the vehicle. After
the blinking RED light turns tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
off, you can drive the vehicle After that, this indicator light/warning light
normally. changes to BLUE and maintains illumina-
tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light
– Illuminated in RED:
– CONTINUED –
turns off when the engine is warmed up & Charge warning light at the proper level but the light remains
sufficiently. illuminated, contact your nearest
If this light illuminates when the engine is SUBARU dealer immediately.
If the engine coolant temperature in- running, it may indicate that the charging
creases over the specified range, the
indicator light/warning light blinks in
system is not working properly. & Engine low oil level
RED. At this time, decelerate the vehicle. If the light illuminates while driving or does warning light
After the blinking RED light turns off, you not turn off after the engine starts, stop the The engine low oil level warning light
can drive the vehicle normally. However, if engine at the first safe opportunity and illuminates when the ignition switch is
the indicator light/warning light often blinks check the alternator belt. If the belt is turned to the “ON” position and turns off
in RED, the electrical system may be loose, broken or if the belt is in good after approximately 2 seconds.
malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU condition but the light remains illuminated,
This light also illuminates when the engine
dealer for an inspection. contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
oil level decreases to the lower limit. The
immediately.
If the engine coolant temperature in- illuminating conditions and remaining oil
level are shown in the following items.
creases further, the indicator light/warning & Oil pressure warning 2.5 L models:
light illuminates in RED continuously. At light
this time, the engine may be overheating. . when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
Safely stop the vehicle as soon as CAUTION position but the engine is not running:
possible, and refer to the emergency approximately 1.9 US qt (1.8 liters, 1.6
steps for the case of engine overheating. Do not operate the engine with the Imp qt)
Refer to “Engine overheating” F9-12. oil pressure warning light on. This . while the engine is running: approxi-
After that, have the system checked by may cause serious engine damage. mately 3.2 US qt (3.0 liters, 2.6 Imp qt)
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
If this light illuminates when the engine is 3.6 L models:
NOTE running, it may indicate that the engine oil . when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
If the engine is restarted after a certain pressure is low and the lubricating system position but the engine is not running:
driving condition, this indicator light/ is not working properly. approximately 4.0 US qt (3.8 liters, 3.3
warning light may illuminate in RED. If the light illuminates while driving or does Imp qt)
However, this is not a malfunction if the not turn off after the engine starts, stop the . while the engine is running: approxi-
indicator light/warning light turns off engine at the first safe opportunity and mately 5.6 US qt (5.3 liters, 4.7 Imp qt)
after a short time. check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
If the engine low oil level warning light
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
illuminates while driving, park the vehicle
at a safe and level location, and then If this light illuminates when the engine is pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
check the engine oil level. When the running, it may indicate that the transmis- a different size than the size indicated on
engine oil level is not within the normal sion fluid temperature is too hot. the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
range, refill with engine oil if necessary. If the light illuminates while driving, im- sure label, you should determine the
Refer to “Engine oil” F11-12. mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place proper tire inflation pressure for those
If the warning light does not turn off after and let the engine idle until the warning tires.) 3
refilling with engine oil or the warning light light turns off. As an added safety feature, your vehicle
illuminates even though the engine oil
! Transmission control system warn- has been equipped with a tire pressure
level is within the normal range, have the monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
ing
system checked by a SUBARU dealer. a low tire pressure telltale when one or
If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes
NOTE after the engine has started, it may more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
. The engine low oil level warning indicate that the transmission control
system is not working properly. Contact pressure telltale illuminates, you should
light will not turn off immediately even
your nearest SUBARU dealer for service stop and check your tires as soon as
if you replace or add engine oil. It will
immediately. possible, and inflate them to the proper
turn off only when the vehicle is idling
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
and the engine is warmed up comple-
tely. & Low tire pressure inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
. When the vehicle is considerably warning light (U.S.-spec. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
inclined on an uphill or steep slope, the models) and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
warning light may illuminate tempora-
When the ignition switch is turned to the stopping ability.
rily due to the movement of engine oil
in the engine. “ON” position, the low tire pressure warn- Please note that the TPMS is not a
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2 substitute for proper tire maintenance,
seconds to check that the tire pressure and it is the driver’s responsibility to
& AT OIL TEMP warning monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning maintain correct tire pressure, even if
light (AT and CVT mod- properly. If there is no problem and all tires under-inflation has not reached the level
els) are properly inflated, the light will go out. to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), pressure telltale.
The AT oil temperature warning light “AT
OIL TEMP” illuminates when the ignition should be checked monthly when cold Your vehicle has also been equipped with
switch is turned to the “ON” position and and inflated to the inflation pressure a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
turns off after approximately 2 seconds. recommended by the vehicle manufac- when the system is not operating properly.
turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
– CONTINUED –
bined with the low tire pressure telltale. your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
When the system detects a malfunction, tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as to have the system inspected.
the telltale will flash for approximately one soon as possible.
minute and then remain continuously If this light illuminates while driving,
illuminated. This sequence will continue never brake suddenly and keep CAUTION
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long driving straight ahead while gradu-
as the malfunction exists. When the The tire pressure monitoring system
ally reducing speed. Then slowly is NOT a substitute for manually
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the pull off the road to a safe place.
system may not be able to detect or signal checking tire pressure. The tire
Otherwise an accident involving pressure should be checked peri-
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS serious vehicle damage and serious
malfunctions may occur for a variety of odically (at least monthly) using a
personal injury could occur. tire gauge. After any change to tire
reasons, including the installation of re-
placement or alternate tires or wheels on If this light still illuminates while pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from driving after adjusting the tire pres- itoring system will not re-check tire
functioning properly. Always check the sure, a tire may have significant inflation pressures until the vehicle
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing damage and a fast leak that causes is first driven more than 20 mph (32
one or more tires or wheels on your the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire sures, increase the vehicle speed to
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS as soon as possible. at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the
to continue to function properly. When a spare tire is mounted or a TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-
Should the warning light illuminate stea- wheel rim is replaced without the tion pressures. If the tire pressures
dily after blinking for approximately one original pressure sensor/transmitter are now above the severe low
minute, have the system inspected by being transferred, the Low tire pres- pressure threshold, the low tire
your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as sure warning light will illuminate pressure warning light should turn
possible. steadily after blinking for approxi- off a few minutes later. Therefore, be
mately one minute. This indicates sure to install the specified size for
WARNING the TPMS is unable to monitor all the front and rear tires.
four road wheels. Contact your
If this light does not illuminate SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
briefly after the ignition switch is for tire and sensor replacement and/ & ABS warning light
turned ON or the light illuminates or system resetting. If the light The ABS warning light illuminates when
steadily after blinking for approxi- illuminates steadily after blinking the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
mately one minute, you should have for approximately one minute,
position and turns off after approximately 2 ate normally. started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
seconds. . When the warning light is flash- nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
This is an indication that the ABS system ing, the ABS system may be and does not indicate a malfunction.
is working properly. malfunctioning. However, the When the battery becomes fully charged,
conventional brake system con- the light will turn off.
CAUTION tinues to operate normally. 3
& Brake system
. If any of the following conditions warning light
The ABS warning light illuminates to-
occur, we recommend that you
gether with the brake system warning light
have the ABS system repaired at WARNING
if the EBD system malfunctions. For
the first available opportunity by
further details of the EBD system mal-
your SUBARU dealer. . Driving with the brake system
function warning, refer to “Brake system
– The warning light does not warning light on is dangerous.
warning light” F3-17.
illuminate when the ignition This indicates your brake system
switch is turned to the “ON” NOTE may not be working properly. If
position. the light remains illuminated,
If the warning light behavior is as
have the brakes inspected by a
– The warning light illuminates described in the following conditions,
SUBARU dealer immediately.
when the ignition switch is the ABS system may be considered
turned to the “ON” position, normal. . If at all in doubt about whether
but it does not turn off even . The warning light illuminates right the brakes are operating prop-
when the vehicle speed ex- after the engine is started but turns off erly, do not drive the vehicle.
ceeds approximately 12 km/h immediately, remaining off. Have your vehicle towed to the
(8 mph). . The warning light remains illumi- nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
nated after the engine has been started, pair.
– The warning light illuminates
during driving. but it turns off when the vehicle speed . If the brake system warning light
reaches approximately 8 mph (12 flashes, the electronic parking
– The warning light flashes. brake system may be malfunc-
km/h).
. When the warning light is on (and . The warning light illuminates during tioning. Immediately stop your
brake system warning light is driving, but it turns off immediately and vehicle in a safe location, use
off), the ABS function shuts remains off. tire stops under the tires to
down; however, the conventional prevent the vehicle from moving
When driving with an insufficient battery
brake system continues to oper- and contact your SUBARU deal-
voltage such as when the engine is jump
– CONTINUED –
er. For details, refer to “Electro- ing if the warning light turns off after do not drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle
nic parking brake” F7-34. the electronic parking brake is re- towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for
leased. repair.
. The brake system warning light may ! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
NOTE flash after the electronic parking brake (EBD) system warning
. When the ignition switch is turned to is frequently applied and released.
the “LOCK” position with the electronic The brake system warning light also
However, the electronic parking brake
parking brake applied, the brake sys- illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the
system is not malfunctioning if the light
tem warning light remains illuminated EBD system. In that event, it illuminates
turns off for a short period of time.
for approximately 30 seconds and then together with the ABS warning light.
This light has the following functions: The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
turns off.
. When the electronic parking brake ! Parking brake warning the brake system warning light and ABS
switch is pressed to apply the electro- warning light illuminate simultaneously
The light illuminates with the parking
nic parking brake while the ignition during driving.
brake applied while the ignition switch is
switch is in the “LOCK” position, the in the “ON” position. It turns off when the Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
brake system warning light illuminates, parking brake is released. tional braking system will still function.
remains illuminated for approximately However, the rear wheels will be more
30 seconds and then turns off. ! Brake fluid level warning prone to locking when the brakes are
. Even if the brake system warning This light illuminates when the brake fluid applied harder than usual and the vehi-
light flashes, if the warning light beha- level has dropped to near the “MIN” level cle’s motion may therefore become some-
vior is as described in the following of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition what harder to control.
examples, the electronic parking brake switch in the “ON” position and with the If the brake system warning light and ABS
system is not malfunctioning. parking brake released. warning light illuminate simultaneously,
– The warning light turns off when If the brake system warning light should take the following steps:
the electronic parking brake is ap- illuminate while driving (with the parking 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
plied or released. brake released and with the ignition switch flat place.
– The warning light turns off when positioned in “ON”), it could be an indica- 2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.
the ignition switch is turned to the tion of leaking of brake fluid or worn brake 3. Release the parking brake. If both
“ON” position again. pads. If this occurs, immediately stop the warning lights turn off, the EBD system
. The brake system warning light may vehicle at the nearest safe place and may be malfunctioning.
flash immediately after the engine is check the brake fluid level. If the fluid level Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
started. However, it is not malfunction- is below the “MIN” mark in the reservoir, dealer and have the system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again ! Parking brake apply inhibit warning nic parking brake system may be
and remain illuminated after the engine malfunctioning. Immediately stop
The brake system warning light flashes for
has been restarted, shut down the engine the vehicle in a safe location and
10 seconds and a chirp sound will be
again, apply the parking brake, and check contact your SUBARU dealer.
heard if the parking brake switch is
the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid”
operated when the parking brake cannot
F11-28.
be applied. The light illuminates when the ignition 3
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the switch is turned to the “ON” position and
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be ! Frequent operation warning turns off after approximately 2 seconds.
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the The brake system warning light flashes for The light illuminates when the Hill Holder
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the 20 seconds and a chirp sound will be switch is pressed to activate the Hill
system inspected. heard if the parking brake switch is Holder function.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the operated too frequently. In this case, the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. operation of the parking brake switch is & Low fuel warning
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the restricted to protect the electronic parking
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. brake system.
light
The low fuel warning light illuminates
! Electronic parking brake system NOTE when the tank is nearly empty approxi-
warning Wait until the warning light turns off. mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp
The brake system warning light flashes gal). It only operates when the ignition
! Emergency released warning switch is in the “ON” position.
when the electronic parking brake system
is malfunctioning. If the warning light The brake system warning light flashes
flashes, promptly park in a safe location when the parking brake is automatically NOTE
as soon as possible and contact your released in case of an emergency. This light does not turn off unless the
SUBARU dealer. tank is replenished up to an internal
The brake system warning light remains
& Hill Holder indicator fuel quantity of approximately 3.7 US
illuminated when the parking brake cannot
light gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal).
be released even if the parking brake
WARNING CAUTION
switch is pulled. For details, refer to
“Electronic parking brake” F7-34. If the Hill Holder indicator light does Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
not illuminate even when the Hill ever the low fuel warning light
Holder switch is pressed to activate illuminates. Engine misfires as a
the Hill Holder function, the electro-
– CONTINUED –
result of an empty tank could cause sponding part of the door open warning engine has started.
damage to the engine. light.
! For AT models
Always make sure this light is not illumi- This light flashes if the vehicle is driven
nated before you start to drive.
& Door open warning with tires of different diameters fitted on its
light wheels or with the air pressure exces-
& Windshield washer sively low in any of its tires.
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” fluid warning light ! For CVT models
position, the door open warning light
This light illuminates when the fluid level in This light illuminates when All-Wheel
illuminates for approximately 2 seconds
the windshield washer fluid tank de- Drive is disengaged and the drive me-
and then turns off.
creases to the lower limit (approximately chanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive
The door open warning light illuminates if 0.6 US qt, 0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt). for maintenance or similar purposes.
any door, the rear gate (Outback) or trunk
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven
lid (Legacy) is not fully closed. This & All-Wheel Drive with tires of different diameters fitted on its
function is effective even if the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position or
warning light (AT and wheels or with the air pressure exces-
the key is removed from the ignition CVT models) sively low in any of its tires.
switch.
WARNING & Vehicle Dynamics
Always make sure this light is not illumi- Control warning light/
nated before you start to drive. Continued driving with the AWD
warning light flashing can lead to Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol operation indicator
& Door open indicator powertrain damage. If the AWD
light
light warning light flashes, promptly park
in a safe place then check whether The light illuminates when the ignition
When any of the doors, the rear gate all four tires are the same diameter switch is turned to the “ON” position and
(Outback) or the trunk lid (Legacy) is not and whether any of the tires has a turns off several seconds after the engine
fully closed, the door open indicator light puncture or has lost air pressure for has started. This lighting pattern indicates
illuminates. This function is effective even some other reason. that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
if the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or is operating normally.
“Acc” position or the key is removed from The All-Wheel Drive warning light illumi-
the ignition switch. nates when the ignition switch is turned to
The open door is indicated by the corre- the “ON” position and turns off after the
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning . The warning light illuminates when ! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
light the electronic control system of the tion indicator light
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system The indicator light flashes during activa-
CAUTION malfunctions. tion of the skid suppression function and
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is during activation of the traction control
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- probably inoperative under any of the function. 3
tem provides its ABS control following conditions. Have your vehicle
through the electrical circuit of the checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- NOTE
ABS system. Accordingly, if the ABS ately. . The light may remain illuminated for
is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
. The warning light does not illuminate a short period of time after the engine
Control system becomes unable to has been started, especially in cold
when the ignition switch is turned to the
provide ABS control. As a result, the
“ON” position. weather. This does not indicate the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system existence of a problem. The light
also becomes inoperative, causing . The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running. should turn off as soon as the engine
the warning light to illuminate. has warmed up.
Though both the Vehicle Dynamics NOTE . The indicator light illuminates when
Control and ABS systems are inop- the engine has developed a problem
erative in this case, the ordinary If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following examples, and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
functions of the brake system are malfunction indicator lamp is on.
still available. You will be safe while the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
driving with this condition, but drive may be considered normal. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
carefully and have your vehicle . The warning light illuminates right probably malfunctioning under the follow-
checked at a SUBARU dealer as after the engine is started but turns off ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
soon as possible. immediately, remaining off. at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The warning light illuminates after . The light does not turn off even after
the engine has started and turns off the lapse of several minutes (the engine
NOTE while the vehicle is subsequently being has warmed up) after the engine has
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle driven. started.
Dynamics Control system itself mal- . The warning light illuminates during
functions, the warning light only illumi- driving, but it turns off immediately and
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock remains off.
Brake System) remains fully opera-
tional.
– CONTINUED –
& Vehicle Dynamics & Security indicator light & Select lever/gear position in-
Control OFF indicator This indicator light shows the status of the
dicator
light alarm system. It also indicates operation
The light illuminates when the ignition of the immobilizer system.
switch is turned to the “ON” position and ! Alarm system
turns off after approximately 2 seconds.
The light illuminates when the Vehicle It blinks to show the driver the operational
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed status of the alarm system. For detailed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con- information, refer to “Alarm system” F2-
trol system. 15.
! Immobilizer system
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under any of the This light blinks approximately 60 seconds
following conditions. Have your vehicle after the ignition switch is turned from
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- “ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK”
ately. position or immediately after the key is 1) Upshift/downshift indicator (AT and CVT
pulled out. Refer to “Immobilizer” F2-3. models)
. The light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” If the indicator light does not flash, it may This indicator shows the position of the
position. indicate that immobilizer system may be shift lever (MT models) or select lever (AT
. The light does not turn off even after a malfunctioning. Contact your nearest and CVT models).
period of approximately 2 seconds after SUBARU dealer immediately.
! Upshift/downshift indicator (AT and
the ignition switch has been turned to the
In the event that an unauthorized key (for CVT models)
“ON” position.
example, an unauthorized duplicate) is When the manual mode is selected, the
used, the security indicator light illumi- gear position indicator (which shows the
nates. current gear selection) and the upshift/
downshift indicator light up. Refer to
“Automatic transmission/Continuously
variable transmission” F7-18.
! Gear position indicator setting (MT : Deactivated & Cruise control indica-
models) tor light
NOTE
The gear position indicator light can be
. The initial setting for your vehicle of The cruise control indicator light illumi-
activated or deactivated by performing the nates when the ignition switch is turned to
the gear position indicator has been set
following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
for activation “ ” at the time of the “ON” position and turns off after 3
shipment from the factory. approximately 3 seconds.
position. . It is not possible to change the This light illuminates when the “CRUISE”
2. Press the trip knob to show “ ” or setting of the gear position indicator main switch is pressed.
“ ” on the trip meter display. when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
The display can be switched as shown in position. Change the setting when the NOTE
the following illustration by pressing the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or . If you press the main switch button
trip knob. “Acc” position. while turning the ignition switch “ON”,
the cruise control function is deacti-
& Turn signal indicator vated and the “CRUISE” indicator light
lights flashes. To reactivate the cruise control
function, turn the ignition switch back
These lights show the operation of the turn
to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and
signal or lane change signal.
then turn it again to the “ON” position.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink . If this indicator light and the CHECK
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned ENGINE warning light/malfunction in-
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. dicator lamp flash simultaneously dur-
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-48. ing driving, have the vehicle checked
*1: “ ” or “ ” and “ ” or “ ” cannot by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
be displayed when the ignition switch is & High beam indicator
in the “ON” position. light
& Cruise control set in-
*2: MT models only This light shows that the headlights are in dicator light
the high beam mode.
3. To change the current setting, press The cruise control set indicator light
the trip knob for at least 2 seconds. This indicator light also illuminates when
the headlight flasher is operated. illuminates when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position and turns off
: Activated after approximately 3 seconds.
– CONTINUED –
This light illuminates when vehicle speed Clock indicated time will change in one-minute
has been set. decrements. If you keep the button
pressed, the rate at which the indicated
& Headlight indicator NOTE time changes will speed up.
light Your SUBARU dealer can change the
settings of activating/deactivating the
This indicator light illuminates under the
automatic adjustment of the clock by
following conditions.
the GPS (Global Positioning System)
. when the light switch is turned to the (for models with the genuine SUBARU
“ ” or “ ” position navigation system). Contact your
. when the light switch is in the “AUTO” SUBARU dealer for details.
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically
Multi function display toggles the display in the following se- . When there is too much sun.
quence. . During idling; while running at low
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine
is restarted immediately following a shut-
down.
. When the actual outside temperature 3
falls outside the specified indicator range.
1) U.S.-spec. models
1) U.S.-spec. models 2) Except U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
When the outside temperature drops to
The outside temperature indicator shows 378F (38C) or lower, the temperature
1) Multi function display switching knob the outside temperature in a range from indication flashes to show that the road
−22 to 1228F (−30 to 508C). surface may be frozen.
With the ignition switch in the “ON”
The indicator can give a false reading If the outside temperature drops to 378F
position, each successive press of the
under any of the following conditions: (38C) or lower while the display is giving
multi function display switching knob
– CONTINUED –
an indication other than the outside & Average fuel consumption NOTE
temperature, the display switches to the . The indicated values vary in accor-
outside temperature indication and flashes dance with changes in the vehicle’s
for 5 seconds before returning to its running conditions. Also, the indicated
original indication. values may differ slightly from the
If the display is already indicating an actual values and should thus be
outside temperature of 378F (38C) or lower treated only as a guide.
when the ignition switch is turned to the . When either trip meter indication is
“ON” position, the indication does not reset, the average fuel consumption
flash. corresponding to that trip meter indica-
tion is not shown until the vehicle has
NOTE subsequently covered a distance of 1
The outside temperature indication mile (or 1 km).
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
1) U.S.-spec. models & Current fuel consumption
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
only as a guide. Be sure to check the
condition of the road surface before This indication shows the average rate of
driving. fuel consumption since the trip meter was
last reset.
Pressing the trip knob toggles the indica-
tion between the average fuel consump-
tion corresponding to the A trip meter
indication and the average fuel consump-
tion corresponding to the B trip meter
indication.
When either of the trip meter indications is
reset, the corresponding average fuel
consumption value is also reset.
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
This indication shows the rate of fuel
a long time with the light control : Auto on/off headlights CAUTION
switch set to a position other When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
than “OFF”, the battery may be position, the headlights, instrument panel If any object is placed on or near the
discharged. illumination, front side marker lights, tail sensor, the sensor may not detect
lights and license plate lights are auto- the level of the ambient light cor-
matically on or off depending on the level rectly and the auto on/off headlights
& Headlights of the ambient light. may not operate properly.
NOTE
The sensitivity of the auto on/off head- & High/low beam change
lights can be changed by your (dimmer)
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details.
! Sensor for the auto on/off head-
lights
& Headlight flasher & Daytime running light system Turn signal lever
WARNING
The brightness of the illumination of
the high beam headlights is reduced 3
by the daytime running light system.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “ ” position when it
is dark outside.
The illumination brightness of the clock The front fog lights operate under the
display, audio, air conditioner, multi func- following conditions.
tion display and meter/gauge dims under . when the light switch is in the “ ”
the following conditions. position
. when the light switch is in the “ ” or . when the light switch is in the “AUTO”
“ ” position position and the headlights turn on auto-
. when the light switch is in the “AUTO” matically
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically However, the front fog lights turn off when
the headlights are switched to high beam.
You can adjust the illumination brightness
for better visibility. To turn on the front fog lights, turn the front
fog light switch on the turn signal lever
To brighten, turn the control dial upward. upward to the “ ” position. To turn off the
To darken, turn the control dial downward. front fog lights, turn the switch back down
to the “OFF” position.
fluid” F11-40. . Grease, wax, insects or other mate- & Windshield wiper and washer
Also, when driving the vehicle rial on the windshield or the wiper switches
when there are freezing tempera- blades results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you The wiper operates only when the ignition
tures, use non-freezing type wi-
cannot remove those streaks after switch is in the “ON” position.
per blades.
operating the washer or if the wiper ! Windshield wipers
. Do not clean the wiper blades operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
with gasoline or a solvent, such face of the windshield or rear window
as paint thinner or benzine. This and the wiper blades using a sponge or
will cause deterioration of the soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
wiper blades. mild abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and wiper
NOTE blades with clean water. The glass is
clean if no beads form on the glass
. The front wiper motor is protected when you rinse with water.
against overloads by a circuit breaker. . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
If the motor operates continuously even after following this procedure,
under an unusually heavy load, the replace the wiper blades with new
circuit breaker may trip to stop the ones. For replacement instructions,
motor temporarily. If this happens, park refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the MIST : Mist (for a single wipe)
F11-41. OFF : Off
wiper switch, and wait for approxi-
INT: Intermittent
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
LO: Low speed
will reset itself, and the wipers will
HI: High speed
again operate normally.
. Clean your wiper blades and win- To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
dow glass periodically with a washer control lever down.
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
road film. Keep the washer button the “OFF” position.
depressed at least for 1 second so that For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
washer solution will be sprinkled all lever up. The wipers operate until you
over the windshield or rear window. release the lever.
– CONTINUED –
& Rear window wiper and lever to the “R” position (AT and CVT Defogger and deicer
washer switch (Outback) models) or the shift lever to the reverse
position (MT models), the rear wiper will
switch to continuous operation. When you
move the select lever/shift lever from the
“R” (reverse) position to another position,
the rear wiper will return to intermittent
operation.
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob on the
end of the wiper control lever upward to
the “ ” position. The washer fluid sprays
until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation) wiper is not in use, turn the knob on the
ON: Continuous end of the wiper control lever downward to
INT: Intermittent the “ ” position. The washer fluid sprays
OFF: Off
and the wiper operates until you release
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)
the knob.
! Rear wiper
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on
the end of the wiper control lever upward
to the “INT” or “ON” position.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob on
the end of the lever to the “OFF” position.
With the switch turned to the “INT” 1) Rear window defogger
position, the rear wiper will operate inter- 2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
mittently at intervals corresponding to the 3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
vehicle speed.
The vehicle is equipped with a rear
When you subsequently move the select
window defogger. Some models are also completely before that time, press the
equipped with an outside mirror defogger control switch to turn them off. If defrost-
and/or windshield wiper deicer. The de- ing, defogging or deicing is not complete,
fogger and deicer system is activated only you have to press the control switch to
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” turn them on again.
position.
For models with the automatic climate
3
control system, it is possible for a
SUBARU dealer to set the defogger and
deicer system for the continuous opera-
tion mode. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for details.
– CONTINUED –
housing. That may cause a malfunction If the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
in the mirror. position, the display setting returns to the
on mode as a default setting the next time
! Rear view image display the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
position and the transmission is in the “R”
(reverse) position, the rear view camera ! Language mode change
automatically displays the rear view image The language mode of the captions on the
behind the vehicle on the inside mirror. rear view image display is selectable in
English or French in the following ways.
Also, the following help lines are indicated 1. Press and hold the power button for 6
as a guide to help you realize the actual to 12 seconds while the transmission is in
distance from the display. the “R” (reverse) position, and then
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line) release it. The display will enter the
2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper language selection mode.
(green horizontal line) 2. Briefly press the power button to
3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line) toggle the captions on the display in
4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper English or French.
(yellow horizontal line) 3. By releasing the power button for 5
5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper seconds, the display blinks one time to
(red horizontal line) show that the language mode is selected.
mode, press and hold the power button for ! Compass zone adjustment ! Compass calibration
12 to 15 seconds while the transmission is
in the “R” (reverse) position, and then 1. For optimum calibration, switch off all
release it. The display is now in the non- nonessential electrical accessories (rear
operational mode. After the display has window defogger, heater/air conditioning
been set to the non-operational mode, the system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all
doors are shut.
3
function indicator will illuminate in orange
while the transmission is in the “R” 2. Drive to an open, level area away from
(reverse) position. large metallic objects or structures and
make certain the ignition switch is in the
To return the display to the operational “ON” position.
mode, press and hold the power button for 3. Press and hold the compass button for
12 to 15 seconds again. 6 to 9 seconds, and then release it. The
For precautions about the rear view compass will enter the calibration mode,
camera and the rear view image, refer to Compass calibration zones
then “C” and the direction will be dis-
“Rear view camera” F6-18. played.
1. Refer to the “Compass calibration 4. Drive slowly in a circle until “C”
! Electronic compass display zones” map shown above to verify that disappears from the display. Driving in
By briefly pressing the compass button, the compass zone setting is correct for two or three circles might be necessary.
the compass display is toggled on or off. your geographical location. The compass is now calibrated.
When the compass display is on, an 2. Press and hold the compass button for 5. Further calibration may be necessary
illuminated compass reading will appear 3 to 6 seconds, and then release it. The should outside influences cause the com-
on the mirror. zone number will be shown on the pass to read inaccurately. You will notice
Using the electronic compass properly, electronic compass display. any outside influence if the compass tends
the following compass zone adjustment 3. Press the compass button repeatedly to read in only one particular direction.
and compass calibration will be neces- until the correct zone number for your Should you encounter this situation, return
sary. location is displayed. to step 1 of the above procedure and
4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will recalibrate the compass.
exit the zone setting mode.
– CONTINUED –
! HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys- by anyone other than an authorized website at www.homelink.com or
tem service facility could void authorization to call 1-800-355-3515.
The HomeLink® Wireless Control System use this equipment.
can be used to activate remote control HomeLink® and the HomeLink® house are
devices such as gate operators, garage CAUTION
registered trademarks of Johnson Con-
door openers, door locks, home lighting trols, Inc. When programming the HomeLink®
and security systems. Wireless Control System to operate
There are three HomeLink® buttons on the
WARNING a garage door opener or an entrance
mirror, each of which can be programmed gate, unplug the device’s motor
. When programming the
for operation of one desired device. For from the outlet during programming
HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-
details on the device types which can be to prevent motor burnout.
tem, you may be operating a
operated by this system, consult the garage door opener or other
HomeLink® website at: device. Make sure that people
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
NOTE
and objects are out of the way . After programming your HomeLink®
3515. of the garage door or other Wireless Control System for the de-
Note the following information about this device to prevent potential harm sired devices, retain the hand-held
system. or damage. transmitters for further programming
If your vehicle is equipped with the . Do not use the HomeLink® Wire- or device testing in the event of a
HomeLink® Wireless Control System, it less Control System with a gar- problem.
complies with Part 15 of the Federal age door opener that lacks the . It is recommended that you insert a
Communications Commission Rules in safety stop and reverse feature new battery in the hand-held transmit-
the U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry as required by applicable safety ter of a device to ensure correct
Canada in Canada. Its operation is subject standards. A garage door opener programming.
to the following two conditions: which cannot detect an object,
(1) this device may not cause harmful signaling the door to stop and ! Garage door opener programming in
interference, and (2) this device must reverse, does not meet these the U.S.A.
accept any interference received, includ- safety standards. Using a garage
ing interference that may cause undesired door opener without these fea- NOTE
operation. tures increases risk of serious When programming the HomeLink®
injury or death. For more infor- Wireless Control System for a garage
Changes and modifications to this system mation, consult the HomeLink® door opener, it is suggested that you
– CONTINUED –
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly begins to flash slowly (after approximately
and then rapidly after several seconds, 20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-
release both buttons. mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/ (25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink®
garage door opener to the outlet. button you wish to program.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door 3. Press and hold the hand-held trans- 3
opener by pressing the programmed mitter button. The HomeLink® indicator
HomeLink® button. light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
! Operating the HomeLink® Wireless rapidly, release both buttons.
Control System
The programming for the previous device
Once programmed, the HomeLink® Wire- is now erased and the new device can be
1) HomeLink® button 1 less Control System can be used to operated by pressing the HomeLink®
2) HomeLink® button 2 remote-control the devices to which its button.
3) HomeLink® button 3 buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate but- ! Erasing HomeLink® button memory
2. Press and hold the two outer ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-
HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button ing that the signal is being transmitted. NOTE
3) until the HomeLink® indicator light . Performing this procedure erases
begins to flash (after approximately 20 ! Programming other devices
the memory of all the preprogrammed
seconds). Then release both buttons. To program other devices such as door buttons simultaneously. The memory
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/ locks, home lighting and security systems, of individual buttons cannot be erased.
garage door opener’s hand-held transmit- contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com . It is recommended that upon the
ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 or call 1-800-355-3515. sale of the vehicle, the memory of all
mm) away from the HomeLink® button you ! Reprogramming a single HomeLink® programmed HomeLink® buttons be
wish to program. button erased for security purposes.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. 1. Press and hold the HomeLink® button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-
the button until step 4 has been com-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
pleted.
until step 6 is complete.
2. When the HomeLink® indicator light
– CONTINUED –
glare from vehicle headlights behind you 3. Press the switch repeatedly until the & Auto-dimming mirror with
and automatically dim the mirror to elim- correct zone setting for your location is compass and HomeLink® (if
inate glare and preserve your vision. For displayed. equipped)
this reason, use care not to cover the 4. Releasing the button for 10 seconds
sensors with stickers, or other similar will exit the zone setting mode.
items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean 3
using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or an ! Compass calibration
applicator.
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
! Compass zone adjustment window, the compass needs to be cali-
brated.
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8
km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
3. You can also calibrate the compass by
driving your vehicle on your everyday
routine. The compass will be calibrated
once it has tracked a complete circle. 1) HomeLink® button 1
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and 2) HomeLink® button 2
hold the switch for 9 seconds until a “C” 3) LED
appears in the compass window. 4) HomeLink® button 3
5. Calibrate the compass according to 5) Sensor
step 2 or step 3. 6) Automatic dimming on/off button
Compass calibration zones 7) Compass display button
1. Refer to the “Compass calibration 8) Compass display
zones” map shown above to verify that The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
the compass zone setting is correct for feature which automatically reduces glare
your geographical location. coming from headlights of vehicles behind
2. Press and hold the switch for 6 you. It also contains a built-in compass
seconds until the zone selection comes and HomeLink® wireless control system.
up (a number will be displayed in the . By pressing the automatic dimming on/
mirror compass window). off button, the automatic dimming function
is toggled on or off. When the automatic
– CONTINUED –
dimming function is on, the LED indicator ! Photosensors ! Compass zone adjustment
will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in the automatic
dimming mode, the mirror surface turns
bright if the transmission is shifted into
reverse. This is to ensure good rearward
visibility during reversing.
. By pressing the compass display but-
ton, the compass display is toggled on or
off. When the compass is on, an illumi-
nated compass reading will appear in the
upper right corner of the mirror.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with Compass calibration zones
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner The mirror has a photosensor attached on
directly on the mirror as that may cause both the front and back sides. During 1. Refer to the “Compass calibration
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror nighttime driving, these sensors detect zones” map shown above to verify that
housing and damage the mirror. distracting glare from vehicle headlights the compass zone setting is correct for
behind you and automatically dim the your geographical location.
mirror to eliminate glare and preserve 2. Press and hold the compass display
your vision. For this reason, use care not button for 3 seconds until the zone
to cover the sensors with stickers, or other selection comes up (a number will be
similar items. Periodically wipe the sen- displayed in the mirror compass window).
sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
3. Press the compass display button
cloth or an applicator.
repeatedly until the correct zone setting
for your location is displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 5 seconds will
exit the zone setting mode.
! Compass calibration www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355- and objects are out of the way of
3515. the garage door or other device
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
window, the compass needs to be cali- to prevent potential harm or
Note the following information about this
brated. damage.
system.
. Do not use the HomeLink® Wire-
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8 If your vehicle is equipped with the
less Control System with a gar- 3
km/h) or less until the display reads a HomeLink® Wireless Control System, it
direction. complies with Part 15 of the Federal age door opener that lacks the
3. Your can also calibrate the compass Communications Commission Rules in safety stop and reverse feature
by driving your vehicle on your everyday the U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry as required by applicable safety
routine. The compass will be calibrated Canada in Canada. Its operation is subject standards. A garage door opener
once it has tracked a complete circle. to the following two conditions: which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and (1) this device may not cause harmful
reverse, does not meet these
hold the compass display button for 9 interference, and (2) this device must
safety standards. Using a garage
seconds until a “C” appears in the accept any interference received, includ-
door opener without these fea-
compass window. ing interference that may cause undesired
tures increases risk of serious
5. Calibrate the compass according to operation.
injury or death. For more infor-
step 2 or step 3. Changes and modifications to this system mation, consult the HomeLink®
by anyone other than an authorized website at www.homelink.com or
! HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys- service facility could void authorization to call 1-800-355-3515.
tem use this equipment.
The HomeLink® Wireless Control System
can be used to activate remote control HomeLink® and the HomeLink® house are CAUTION
devices such as gate operators, garage registered trademarks of Johnson Con-
door openers, door locks, home lighting trols, Inc. When programming the HomeLink®
and security systems. Wireless Control System to operate
WARNING a garage door opener or an entrance
There are three HomeLink® buttons on the gate, unplug the device’s motor
mirror, each of which can be programmed . When programming the from the outlet during programming
for operation of one desired device. For HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys- to prevent motor burnout.
details on the device types which can be tem, you may be operating a
operated by this system, consult the garage door opener or other
HomeLink® website at: device. Make sure that people
– CONTINUED –
NOTE NOTE
. After programming your HomeLink® Some gate operators and garage door
Wireless Control System for the de- openers may require you to replace
sired devices, retain the hand-held this programming step 4 with proce-
transmitters for further programming dures in “Programming for entrance
or device testing in the event of a gates and garage door openers in
problem. Canada” F3-49.
. It is recommended that you insert a
5. Hold down both buttons until the
new battery in the hand-held transmit-
HomeLink® indicator light flashes, first
ter of a device to ensure correct
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
programming.
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
! Garage door opener programming in released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-
the U.S.A. 1) HomeLink® button 1 cates successful programming of the new
2) HomeLink® button 2 frequency signal.)
NOTE 3) HomeLink® button 3 6. Press and hold the programmed but-
When programming the HomeLink® ton and check the HomeLink® indicator
2. Press and hold the two outer light. If the indicator light stays on con-
Wireless Control System for a garage HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button
door opener, it is suggested that you tinuously, your garage door should acti-
3) until the indicator light begins to flash vate and the programming is completed.
park the vehicle outside the garage. (after approximately 20 seconds). Then
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door release both buttons. If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
opener from the outlet. 3. Hold the end of the garage door seconds and then stays on continuously,
opener’s hand-held transmitter between your garage door opener may be pro-
NOTE 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from tected by a rolling code feature. In this
If any of the HomeLink® buttons are the HomeLink® button you wish to pro- case you need to perform the additional
already programmed for other devices, gram. steps that are described in “Programming
skip step 2 because it clears the rolling-code-protected garage door open-
4. Simultaneously press and hold both
memory of all three buttons. ers in the U.S.A.” F3-49.
the hand-held transmitter button and the
desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT re-
lease the buttons until step 5 has been
completed.
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly begins to flash slowly (after approximately
and then rapidly after several seconds, 20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-
release both buttons. mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/ (25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink®
garage door opener to the outlet. button you wish to program.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door 3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-
opener by pressing the programmed mitter button. The HomeLink® indicator
HomeLink® button. light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
! Operating the HomeLink® Wireless rapidly, release both buttons.
Control System
The programming for the previous device
Once programmed, the HomeLink® Wire- is now erased and the new device can be
1) HomeLink® button 1 less Control System can be used to operated by pressing the HomeLink®
2) HomeLink® button 2 remote-control the devices to which its button.
3) HomeLink® button 3 buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate but- ! Erasing HomeLink® button memory
2. Press and hold the two outer ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-
HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button ing that the signal is being transmitted. NOTE
3) until the HomeLink® indicator light . Performing this procedure erases
begins to flash (after approximately 20 ! Programming other devices
the memory of all the preprogrammed
seconds). Then release both buttons. To program other devices such as door buttons simultaneously. The memory
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/ locks, home lighting and security systems, of individual buttons cannot be erased.
garage door opener’s hand-held transmit- contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com . It is recommended that upon the
ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 or call 1-800-355-3515. sale of the vehicle, the memory of all
mm) away from the HomeLink® button you ! Reprogramming a single HomeLink® programmed HomeLink® buttons be
wish to program. button erased for security purposes.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. 1. Press and hold the HomeLink® button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-
the button until step 4 has been com-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
pleted.
until step 6 is complete.
2. When the HomeLink® indicator light
WARNING
3
Objects look smaller in a convex
mirror and farther away than when
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use
the convex mirror to judge the
distance of vehicles behind you
when changing lanes. Use the inside
mirror (or glance backwards) to
1) HomeLink® button 1 determine the actual size and dis-
2) HomeLink® button 2 tance of objects that you view in
3) HomeLink® button 3 convex mirror. The remote control mirrors operate only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons “Acc” position.
(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator 1. Turn the knob to the “L” side to adjust
light begins to flash (after approximately the left-hand mirror or to the “R” side to
20 seconds). adjust the right-hand mirror.
2. Release both buttons. 2. Move the knob in the direction you
want to move the mirror.
! In case a problem occurs 3. Return the knob to the neutral position
If you cannot activate a device using the to prevent unintentional operation.
corresponding HomeLink® button after
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-
programming, contact HomeLink® at
ally.
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515 for assistance.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt/
telescopic position while driving.
This may cause loss of vehicle
control and result in personal injury.
Climate control
Ventilator
& Airflow selection
1) Open
2) Close
1) Open
2) Close Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
To open the ventilator, turn the side grille
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
open/close wheel upward to the “ ”
To open the ventilator, turn the center grille position.
open/close wheel to the “ ” position.
To close it, turn the wheel downward to the
To close it, turn the wheel to the “ ” “ ” position.
position.
! Fan speed control dial This dial regulates the temperature of : Windshield defroster outlets, foot out-
airflow from the air outlets over a range lets and both side outlets of the instrument
from the blue side (cool) to red side panel
(warm).
: Windshield defroster outlets and both
! Airflow control buttons side outlets of the instrument panel
NOTE
When the “ ” button or “ ” button is 4
pressed the air conditioner compres-
sor automatically operates to quickly
defog the windshield. However the
indicator on the air conditioner button
will not illuminate. At the same time,
the air inlet selection is automatically
The fan operates only when the ignition set to “outside air” mode.
switch is turned to the “ON” position. The
fan speed control dial is used to select
four fan speeds.
! Temperature control dial Each airflow control button activates the
following air outlets.
: Instrument panel outlets
: Instrument panel outlets and foot
outlets
: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the
instrument panel and some through wind-
shield defroster outlets (A small amount of
air flows to the windshield and both side
windows to prevent fogging.)
– CONTINUED –
3. Turn the temperature control dial all foot outlets is slightly warmer than from WARNING
the way to the right. the instrument panel outlets.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the Continued operation in the ON posi-
highest speed. OFF position. tion may fog up the windows. Switch
2. Press the “ ” button. to the OFF position as soon as the
! Heating and defrosting 3. Set the temperature control dial to the outside dusty condition clears.
To direct warm air toward the floor and the desired temperature level.
windshield: 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the & Air conditioner operation 4
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the desired speed.
OFF position. ! Cooling or dehumidifying
Setting the temperature control dial fully
2. Press the “ ” button. For cooling and dehumidification of the
turned to the red area or blue area passenger compartment, air flows through
3. Set the temperature control dial to the decreases the temperature difference
most comfortable level. the instrument panel outlets:
between the air from the instrument panel
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
outlets and the air from the foot outlets.
desired speed. OFF position.
! Ventilation 2. Press the “ ” button.
! Heating To force outside air through the instrument 3. Set the air conditioner button to the
To direct warm air toward the floor: panel outlets: “ON” position.
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the 4. Set the temperature control dial to the
OFF position. OFF position. blue side.
2. Press the “ ” button. 2. Press the “ ” button. 5. Set the fan speed control dial at the
3. Set the temperature control dial to the 3. Set the temperature control dial all the desired speed.
most comfortable level. way left.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the ! Defrosting or defogging
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired speed. desired speed. To direct warm air to the windshield and
front door windows:
! Bi-level heating When driving on a dusty road, set the air 1. Press the “ ” button.
inlet control button to the ON position.
This setting allows you to direct air of 2. Set the temperature control dial to the
different temperatures from the instrument red side.
panel and foot outlets. The air from the 3. Set the fan speed control dial at the
highest speed.
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
! AUTO button you operated. To change the system back ! Temperature control button
FULL AUTO mode operation: to the FULL AUTO mode, press the
“AUTO” button.
! OFF button
Driver’s side
When the “AUTO” button is pressed, the
indicator light “FULL AUTO” on the display
illuminates. In this state, fan speed, airflow The automatic climate control system
distribution, air-inlet control, and air con- turns off (the air conditioner compressor
ditioner compressor operation are auto- and fan turn off) when the “OFF” button is
matically controlled. pressed.
AUTO mode operation: When the “OFF” button is pressed, the
outside air circulation mode (air inlet
If you operate any of the buttons on the
selection OFF) is automatically selected.
control panel other than the “OFF” button,
rear window defogger button and tem-
perature control buttons during FULL
AUTO mode operation, the indicator light
“FULL” on the control panel will turn off Passenger’s side
and the indicator light “AUTO” will remain To increase the temperature setting, press
illuminated. You can then manually control the “ ” side of the temperature control
the system as desired using the button button. To decrease the temperature
setting, press the “ ” side of the tempera- To deactivate the DUAL mode: windshield, return the climate control
ture control button. Press the “DUAL” button again. When the system to the FULL AUTO mode by
Each temperature setting is shown on the DUAL mode is deactivated, the indicator pressing the “AUTO” button or turn off by
display. When the “LO” is shown, the light on the “DUAL” button turns off and pressing the “OFF” button.
system provides maximum cooling perfor- the temperature setting for the front Alternatively, press the “ ” button again
mance. When the “HI” is shown, the passenger’s side becomes the same as to return the system to the setting that was
system provides maximum heating perfor- the setting for the driver’s side. selected before you activated the defros-
mance. ! – Defroster button ter. 4
! DUAL mode ! Fan speed control button
! A/C – Air conditioner button ! Airflow mode selection button (Heat-def): Windshield defroster out-
lets, foot outlets and both side outlets of
the instrument panel
NOTE
When the “ ” mode is selected, the air
conditioner compressor automatically
operates to quickly defog the wind-
shield and the air inlet selection is
automatically set to the “outside air”
mode.
! Air inlet selection button
If the windshield starts to fog when the Select the desired airflow mode by press-
climate control system is operated in the ing the airflow mode selection button. The
AUTO mode, press the air conditioner selected airflow mode is shown on the
button “A/C” to defog and dehumidify. display.
When this button is pressed, the air There are four airflow modes that activate
conditioner compressor turns on and the the following air outlets.
indicator light “A/C” on the display illumi-
nates. To turn off the air conditioner (Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets
compressor, press the “A/C” button again.
(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and
NOTE foot outlets
The air conditioner compressor does (Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of Select airflow by pressing the air inlet
not operate when the outside air tem- the instrument panel and some through selection button “ ”.
perature is below 328F (08C). windshield defroster outlets (A small ON position (recirculation): Interior air is
amount of air flows to the windshield and recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
both side windows to prevent fogging.) air inlet selection button to the ON position
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
when driving on a dusty road. The & Temperature sensors and become damaged, the system may
indicator light will illuminate. not be able to control the interior tempera-
OFF position (outside Air): Outside air is ture correctly. To avoid damaging the
drawn into the passenger compartment. sensors, observe the following precau-
Press the air inlet selection button to the tions:
OFF position when the interior has cooled – Do not subject the sensors to impact.
to a comfortable temperature and the road – Keep water away from the sensors.
is no longer dusty. The indicator light will – Do not cover the sensors. 4
turn off.
The sensors are located as follows:
WARNING – Solar sensor: beside the speaker grille
on the dashboard
Continued operation in the ON posi-
tion (recirculation) may fog up the – Interior air temperature sensor: on the
windows. Switch to the OFF position side of the driver-side part of the center
(outside air) as soon as the outside panel
dusty condition clears. – Outside temperature sensor: behind
front grille.
NOTE
When driving on a dusty road or behind
a vehicle that emits unpleasant exhaust
gases, set the air inlet selection button
to the ON position (recirculation).
From time to time, return the air inlet
selection button to the OFF position
(outside air) to draw outside air into the
passenger compartment. 1) Solar sensor
2) Interior air temperature sensor
The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly
Operating tips for heater and heated interior. This results in quicker system.
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
air conditioner windows closed during the operation of & Air conditioner compressor
& Cleaning ventilator grille the air conditioner for maximum cooling shut-off when engine is
efficiency. heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
& Lubrication oil circulation in the air conditioner compressor is designed
the refrigerant circuit to temporarily shut off during air condi-
Operate the air conditioner compressor at tioner operation whenever the accelerator
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving is fully depressed such as during rapid
speeds) a few minutes each month during acceleration or when driving on a steep
the off-season to circulate its oil. upgrade.
Replacement schedule:
Every 15 months or 15,000 miles (24,000
km) whichever comes first
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the (2) Remove the damper shaft from the
following occurs, even if it is not yet glove box.
time to change the filter.
. Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or 2. Remove the cover of the air filter.
misted.
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Black plate (9,1)
Audio
5-2 Audio
Antenna system any other material over the antenna Installation of accessories
portion of the rear window glass.
& Printed antenna Always consult your SUBARU dealer
& FM reception before installing a citizen band radio or
CAUTION Although FM is normally static free, other transmitting device in your vehicle.
reception can be affected by the surround- Such devices may cause the electronic
Do not use sharp instruments or ing area, atmospheric conditions, station control system to malfunction if they are
window cleaner containing abra- strength and transmitter distance. Build- incorrectly installed or if they are not
sives to clean the inner surface of ings or other obstructions may cause suited for the vehicle.
the window on which the antenna is momentary static, flutter or station inter-
printed. Doing so may damage the ference. If reception continues to be
antenna printed on the window. unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.
Audio 5-3
Audio set
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one
of the following audio sets. See the pages
indicated in this section for operating
details.
NOTE
If a cell phone is placed near the audio
set, it may cause the audio set to emit
noise when the phone receives calls.
5
This noise does not indicate an audio
set malfunction. Note that a cell phone
should be placed as far as possible
from the audio set.
– CONTINUED –
5-4 Audio
& Type A audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and sound controls: refer to
page 5-6
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-9
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-13
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-18
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-28
Audio 5-5
& Type B audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and sound controls: refer to
page 5-6
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-9
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-13
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-18 5
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-28
5-6 Audio
Power and sound controls & Sound control ! Other sound setting controls (type
A audio)
& Power switch and volume ! Tone and balance control
control
Choose the desired level for each mode Choose the desired settings for each
by turning the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. mode by turning the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
The control function returns to the tune/
track/channel control mode after approxi- The control function returns to the tune/
mately 5 seconds. track/channel control mode after approxi-
mately 5 seconds.
Audio 5-7
5-8 Audio
Audio 5-9
& FM selection
– CONTINUED –
5-10 Audio
! Seek tuning (SEEK) ! Scan tuning (SCAN) tall buildings and hills.
! PTY (Program type) group tuning
(only FM reception)
If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the If you press the “SCAN” button, the radio
“SEEK” button briefly, the radio will auto- will switch to the scan mode. In this mode,
matically search for a receivable station the radio scans through the radio band Press the “PTY/CAT” button to change to
and stop at the first one it finds. This until a station is found. The radio will stop the PTY selection mode. At this time, the
function may not be available, however, at the station for 5 seconds while display- PTY group that you are currently listening
when radio signals are weak. In such a ing the frequency, after which scanning to will be displayed for 10 seconds. In PTY
situation, perform manual tuning to select will continue until the entire band has been selection mode, “PTY SEL” is displayed
the desired station. scanned. on the screen.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel
the SCAN mode. If you press the “SCAN”
button while the radio is stopped at a
station, the radio stays stopped at that
station. If you press the button while the
radio is scanning, the radio stops at the
next receivable station.
Automatic tuning may not function prop-
erly if the station reception is weakened by
distance from the station or proximity to
Audio 5-11
! PTY (Program type) group selection ! Seek in PTY (Program type) group & RDS text display
In PTY selection mode, press the “PTY” In the PTY selection mode, when the If the PS (Program Service Name) and/or
button “ ” or “ ” to change the PTY desired PTY group has been selected, RT (Radio Text) are available, pressing
group by one step at a time. pressing the “SEEK” button “ ” or “ ” the “TEXT” button changes the display
Pressing “ ” changes the PTY group up seeks within that PTY group. In this case, among PS, RT and frequency. The initial
by one step. Pressing “ ” changes the “PTY SEEK” is displayed on the screen. setting is “PS”.
PTY group down by one step. Pressing “ ” seeks up. Pressing “ ”
seeks down. NOTE
This operation only changes the display. It
does not change the station that is The control function returns to the normal . The maximum number of characters
currently being received. mode after approximately 10 seconds. that can be displayed for PS is 8.
. The maximum number of characters
that can be displayed for RT is 64.
. If RT is 16 characters or longer,
press and hold the “TEXT” button for
0.5 second or longer in order to change
the page.
– CONTINUED –
5-12 Audio
Audio 5-13
mode received before pressing the button. Satellite radio operation (if
– Switching to the other band equipped)
– Press the “A.S” button
– Press the “SCAN” button To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to
– Press the “SEEK” button install the SUBARU genuine satellite
– Press any of the preset buttons receiver for some models, and to enter
– Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial into a contract with a satellite radio
– Turn off the audio system network service such as “XMTM satellite
– Turn off the ignition switch radio” (for U.S.A. only) or “Sirius satellite
. When you use the Auto-store func- radio”. For details, please contact your 5
tion while selecting the FM mode, even SUBARU dealer.
if you have selected the FM1 or FM2
station, the new stations are stored in & XMTM satellite radio (for U.S.
the FM3 station. A. only)
. If it is only possible to receive less XMTM is a continental U.S. based satellite
than 6 stations, the available stations radio service, including music, news,
are stored from preset 1 in order by sports, talk and children’s programming.
frequency and the unused preset but- XMTM provides digital quality audio and
tons are not registered to a station. text information, including song title and
Also, the previously registered station artist name. A service fee is required to
memories of the unused preset buttons receive the XM TM service. For more
are cleared. information, contact XMTM at
. If no stations can be received, the www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XM-
previously stored stations are not re- RADIO (1-800-967-2346).
placed.
. After pressing the “A.S” button, if & Sirius satellite radio
more than 1 station is stored, the radio Sirius satellite radio is a recent innovation
receives the station stored in preset 1. that allows the listener to experience
. After pressing the “A.S” button, if no digital sound quality and to have a greater
stations are stored, the radio receives variety of channels.
the band and station that the radio Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a
– CONTINUED –
5-14 Audio
tuner, antenna and a service contract. For ! XMTM satellite radio reception tips signals can be blocked by objects such as
details, please contact your SUBARU for antenna on the windshield (for buildings, but the network of repeater
dealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio at U.S.A. only — if equipped) stations allows signal coverage within
www.sirius.com or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS urban areas such as cities.
(7474) for more information. Sirius, the
Sirius dog logo, channel names and logos You may experience problems in receiving
are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio XMTM satellite radio signals in the follow-
Inc. ing situations.
. If you are driving northward in a coastal
& Satellite radio reception area
Because the satellite radio antenna is
Satellite radio signals are best received in
located on the windshield, the signal
areas with a clear view of the open sky. In
comes from the south and may not be
areas where there are tall buildings, trees,
able to reach the antenna in some
tunnels or other structures that may
circumstances when you are driving north.
obstruct the signal of the satellites, there
may be signal interruptions. Other circum-
stances that may result in signal loss For some models, the satellite radio
include driving near a wall, steep cliff, hill antenna is fixed to the upper right hand
or driving on the lower level of a multi- corner of the windshield.
tiered road or inside of a parking garage.
The XMTM satellite radio receiver that is
To help reduce this condition, satellite
fitted to your vehicle receives the neces-
radio providers have installed ground-
sary signals from two specially designated
based repeaters in heavily populated
satellites that are in a geostationary orbit
areas. However, you may still experience
over the equator. One satellite covers the
reception problems in some areas.
east coast and the other covers the west
coast. Both of them direct their signals
north. These signals are then relayed
throughout the radio reception area by a . If you are driving in a tunnel or a
network of ground repeater stations. The covered parking area
satellite radio signals are transmitted as . If you are driving beneath the top level
“line of sight” signals. The line of sight of a multi-level freeway
Audio 5-15
. If you drive under a bridge unforeseen circumstances when there & Band selection
. If you are driving next to a tall vehicle are problems with the reception of XMTM
(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the satellite radio signals.
signal
. If you are driving in a valley where the & Displaying satellite radio ID
surrounding hills or peaks block the signal of tuner
from the south When you activate satellite radio, you
. If you are driving on a mountain road should have your satellite radio tuner ID
where the southern direction is blocked by ready because each tuner is identified by
mountains its unique satellite radio tuner ID. 5
The satellite radio ID will be needed when
you activate satellite radio and receive
satellite radio customer support.
The satellite radio ID can be found on the
audio display by tuning the channel to Press the “SAT” button when the radio is
“000”. off to turn on the radio.
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial to select Press the “SAT” button when the radio is
the satellite radio channel. on to select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 recep-
tion.
NOTE
For Sirius, change the display to an
indication mode other than the channel
number after performing the above
. If you are driving in an area with tall operation.
trees that block the signal (10 m or more),
for example on a road that goes through a
dense forest
. The signal can become weak in some
areas that are not covered by the repeater
station network.
Please note that these may be other
– CONTINUED –
5-16 Audio
& Channel and category selec- ! Channel selection by pressing the ! Skip channel selection
tion button
! Channel selection by operating the
dial
Audio 5-17
! Category selection pressing the “FOLDER” button “ ” the ALL SCAN mode, the radio scans all
changes the category up by one step. channels.
Pressing “ ” changes the category down In both SCAN modes, the radio will stop at
by one step. the station for 5 seconds while displaying
When a category is selected, pressing the the channel number, after which scanning
“SEEK” button selects channels only with- will continue until the entire channel has
in the selected category. been scanned from the low end to the high
The control function returns to the normal end.
mode after approximately 10 seconds. Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel
! Channel scan the SCAN mode and to stop on any 5
displayed channel.
5-18 Audio
Audio 5-19
& How to insert a CD (type A) If no indicator blinks, it means that there is ! Inserting a disc in a desired posi-
While the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or no idle position in the magazine. tion
“ON” position, hold a disc with a finger in 2. When the “LOAD” indicator illumi-
the center hole while gripping the edge of nates, insert the disc. Once you have
the disc, then insert it in to the slot (with inserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator will
the label side up) and the player will turn off and the “LOADING” indicator will
automatically pull the disc into position. illuminate. The disc will then be automa-
tically drawn in, the player will begin to
NOTE play back the first track of the disc, the
DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE “LOADING” indicator will turn off and the 5
DISC INSERTION SLOT AT A TIME. “READING” indicator will illuminate.
. To insert more discs in succession,
& How to insert a CD(s) (type B) repeat steps 1 and 2. The magazine will
be loaded with discs in the ascending
order of position number.
. If you do not insert any disc in 15 1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the
seconds after you have pressed the magazine in the player has an idle
“LOAD” button, the player will return to position where you can insert a disc, the
the original mode that was selected before disc number indicator associated with the
the “LOAD” button was pressed. idle position will blink.
. The disc indicator steadily lights up if a The positions in the magazine the indica-
disc is already inserted in the correspond- tor of which steadily lights up are already
ing position of the magazine. loaded with discs.
. While the player is in the loading mode,
if you press “FM”, “AM” or “SAT” button,
the player will enter the standby mode.
1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the Press the “CD/AUX” button to start play-
magazine in the player has an idle back.
position where you can insert a disc, the
disc number indicator associated with the
idle position will blink.
– CONTINUED –
5-20 Audio
if you press “FM”, “AM” or “SAT” button, 4. When the magazine is filled with discs
the player will enter standby mode. Press by repeating steps 2 and 3, the player will
the “CD/AUX” button to start playback. start playback of the discs, beginning with
! Loading all the magazine (full disc the one inserted first.
loading mode) If you fail to insert any disc during each 15
seconds interval, the full disc loading
mode will be canceled, and the player will
start playback of the disc inserted first.
& How to play back a CD
NOTE
For type A audio, if a disc that the
Disc select buttons player cannot read has been loaded,
the player will display the message
2. Press the disc select button at the “CHECK DISC”.
position where you want to insert a disc.
3. When the “LOAD” indicator illumi- ! When there is no CD inserted
nates, insert the disc. Once you have Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a
inserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator will 1. If you continue to press the “LOAD” CD (type A)” F5-19 / “How to insert a CD
turn off. The disc will then be automatically button for more than 1.5 seconds, the (s) (type B)” F5-19.
drawn in, and the player will begin to play player will produce beep sound and will When a CD is loaded, the player will start
the first track on the disc. enter the full disc loading mode. playback of the CD, beginning with the
. If you wish to insert another disc, 2. When the disc number indicator first track.
repeat the procedure beginning with step flashes and “ALL LOAD” indicator illumi-
1. nates, insert a disc within 15 seconds. If a
. If you do not insert any disc in 15 disc is successfully loaded during this
seconds after you have pressed the period, the disc number indicator will stop
“LOAD” button, the player will return to blinking and will steadily light.
the original mode that was selected before 3. When the loading of a disc is com-
the “LOAD” button was pressed. plete, the next idle disc number indicator
. While the player is in the loading mode, will blink. Then repeat step 2.
Audio 5-21
! When CD is in the player (type A)/ ! When selecting a CD to play (type & To select a track from its
When playing back all CDs in the B) beginning
player (type B)
! Forward direction
– CONTINUED –
5-22 Audio
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial counter- Press the “ ” side of the “SEEK” button
clockwise to skip to the beginning of the continuously to fast-reverse the track/file.
current track/file (track). Each time the dial Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
is turned, the indicated track/file (track) Press the “ ” side of the “SEEK” button
number will decrease. continuously to fast-forward the track/file. NOTE
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding. If you fast-reverse to the beginning of
NOTE the first track/file (track), fast-reversing
In an MP3, WMA or AAC folder, skip- NOTE will stop and the player will start play-
ping past the first track/file (track) will If you fast-forward to the end of the last back.
take you to the last track/file (track) in track/file (track), fast-forwarding will
the folder. stop and the player will start playback
beginning with the first track/file
(track).
Audio 5-23
& Repeating track/file (track) is playing. . The “DISC RPT” indication refers to
Each time you briefly press the button, the the repeat playback of a disc. It repeats
mode changes in the following se- the tracks on the CD. It is only possible
quences. to select this function for type B audio.
Type A audio: To cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play
mode, briefly press the “RPT” button and
select CANCEL. The “RPT” indication will
turn off, and the normal playback mode
will be resumed.
NOTE 5
Type B audio:
The repeat-play mode will be cancelled
if you perform any of the following
steps:
Type A audio . Press the “RPT/RDM” button and
select CANCEL (type A audio)
. Press the “RPT” button and select
NOTE CANCEL (type B audio)
. Press the “ ” button
. The “TRACK RPT” indication refers . Press the disc select button
to the repeat playback of a single track. . Press the “SCAN” button
It repeats the track that is playing. . Press the “LOAD” button when
. The “FOLDER RPT” indication re- there is free space in the CD magazine
fers to the repeat playback of a folder. It
repeats the all of the tracks in the
folder. It is possible to select the
function when the MP3/WMA/AAC for-
mat track is playing.
Type B audio
To repeat a track/file (track), briefly press
the “RPT/RDM” button (type A audio) or
“RPT” button (type B audio) while the
– CONTINUED –
5-24 Audio
& Random playback the “RDM” button (type B audio). the folder. It is possible to select the
. For type A audio, press the “RPT/RDM” function when an MP3/WMA/AAC for-
button for 0.5 second or longer. mat track is playing.
. For type B audio, press the “RDM” . The “DISC RDM” indication refers to
button. the random playback of a disc. It
randomly repeats the tracks in the CD.
Each time you press the button, the mode It is possible to select the function
changes in the following sequences. when an MP3/WMA/AAC format track is
Type A audio: playing.
To cancel the random playback mode,
press the “RPT/RDM” button for 0.5
second or longer again (type A audio) or
press the “RPT” button again (type B
audio) and select CANCEL.
Type A audio The “RDM” indication will turn off, and the
Type B audio: normal playback mode will be resumed.
NOTE
Random playback will be cancelled if
you perform any of the following steps:
. Press the “RPT/RDM” button for 0.5
second or longer and select CANCEL
NOTE (type A audio)
. The “RDM” indication refers to the . Press the “RPT” button and select
random playback of the tracks. It CANCEL (type B audio)
randomly repeats the tracks on the . Press the “ ” button
CD. It is possible to select the function . Press the disc select button
when formats other than the MP3/WMA/ . Press the “SCAN” button
Type B audio AAC format CD is playing. . Press the “LOAD” button when
To play back a track/file(s) at random, . The “FOLDER RDM” indication re- there is free space in the CD magazine
press the “RPT/RDM” button for 0.5 fers to the random playback in the . Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
second or longer (type A audio) or press folder. It randomly repeats the tracks in “FOLDER” button
Audio 5-25
5-26 Audio
NOTE ginning with the first track/file (track). & How to eject CDs from the
The display is designed to show titles player (type B)
for up to 30 characters. & How to eject a CD from the NOTE
player (type A) . Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
& Folder selection sticking out, because vibration might
make it fall out.
. If you do not remove the ejected
disc within approximately 15 seconds,
a disc protection function will operate,
automatically reloading the disc. In this
case, the disc is not played.
! Ejecting a CD from the player
Audio 5-27
! Ejecting all discs from the player . If you press the “CD/AUX” button or
(all disc ejection mode) “LOAD” button while the player is in all
disc ejection mode, the player will draw
in the discs that have been ejected and
play them.
5-28 Audio
Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch Auxiliary input jack
CDs are not supported) and data format
are correct. This player can only play CD-
DA, MP3, WMA and AAC data formats. If
the disc cannot be unloaded or this
message remains displayed, please con-
tact your SUBARU dealer.
Audio 5-29
– CONTINUED –
5-30 Audio
Audio 5-31
Audio control buttons of the steering wheel. They allow the connected.
driver to control audio functions without
(if equipped) taking his/her hands off the steering
*4: Only when an iPod is connected using the
iPod adapter that is available as a dealer
wheel. option.
Type A audio
This button is used to select the desired ! With radio mode selected
audio mode. Each time it is pressed, the
mode changes to the next one in the Press the switch to the “ ” or “ ” side
following sequence. briefly to skip to a preset channel. Press
the switch to the “ ” or “ ” side for more
than 0.5 second to seek the next recei-
vable station and stop at it.
That station’s frequency will be indicated
on the audio display.
*1: The frequency last received in the selected
! With CD mode selected
waveband will be displayed.
*2: Only when a CD is in the player. Press the switch to the “ ” side to skip
Type B audio forward in the track/file (track) order. Press
*3: Only when an auxiliary audio product is
These buttons are located on the spokes the switch to the “ ” side to skip back-
– CONTINUED –
5-32 Audio
ward in the track/file (track) order. A number indicating the volume will be Hands-free system (if
The track/file (track) number will be shown shown on the audio display.
equipped)
on the audio display.
! With SAT mode selected & MUTE button (if equipped)
NOTE
Press the switch to the “ ” side to skip
forward in the channel order. Press the . For models with the genuine
switch to the “ ” side to skip backward in SUBARU navigation system, refer to
the channel order. When the switch is the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
briefly pressed, the channel will skip every navigation system.
1 channel. When the switch is pressed for . When selling your vehicle, make
more than 0.5 second, the channel will sure that you initialize the Hands-free
skip every 10 channels. The channel will system to prevent personal data from
be shown on the audio display. being improperly accessed.
The Hands-free system operates while the
& Volume control switch ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
Audio 5-33
& Tips for the Hands-free sys- with it left in the breast pocket or bag. volume may be different from those of
tem cell phones currently used.
NOTE . When the ignition switch is turned to
! Bluetooth® . The Hands-free system may not the “LOCK” position during a call, the
operate properly under the following call may be disconnected or continued
conditions. on the cell phone depending on the
– The cell phone is turned off. type of cell phone that is used. Note
– The cell phone is not in the that operation of the cell phone may be
phone call area. necessary if the call is continued on the
– The battery of the cell phone has cell phone. 5
run down. . Do not speak at the same time as the
– The cell phone is not connected other party during a call. If you and the
to the Hands-free system. party speak at the same time, it may be
– The cell phone is behind the seat difficult for the other party to hear your
or in the glove box. voice and vice versa. This is normal.
– A metal material covers or . The receiver sound volume should
touches the cell phone. be set as low as possible. Otherwise,
NOTE . Depending on the type of cell phone the party you are calling may notice an
The Bluetooth word mark and logo are that is used, the screen on the cell undesirable echo sound.
registered trademarks of Bluetooth phone may remain illuminated while . Speak clearly and loudly.
SIG, Inc. the ignition switch is in the “ON” . Your voice may be difficult to be
position. If this occurs, turn the illumi- heard by the party under the following
It is possible to connect a cell phone to the
nation off by adjusting the cell phone conditions.
in-vehicle equipment through the Blue-
settings. – Driving on a rough road.
tooth® format (wireless) to make a phone
call from the in-vehicle equipment or take . Depending on the setting of the cell – Driving at a high speed.
an incoming phone call. phone, the dial lock function may be – Driving with a window open.
activated after making a call. Deacti- – When air from the ventilator
Since the Bluetooth® format is wireless, a
vate the automatic dial lock function of blows directly towards the micro-
connection between the in-vehicle equip-
the cell phone before using the Hands- phone.
ment and the cell phone can be made
free system.
without placing them in close vicinity of – When the sound coming from the
each other. The cell phone can be used . Depending on the type of cell phone ventilator is loud.
that is used, operation and the sound
– CONTINUED –
5-34 Audio
– When the cell phone is too close user’s authority to operate the equip- & Safety precautions
to the microphone. ment.
. The sound quality may degrade due . This equipment has been tested and WARNING
to the influence of the cell phone that is found to comply with the limits for a
connected to the system or the circum- Class B digital device, pursuant to Part . For safety reasons, avoid operat-
stances of the Bluetooth network. 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are ing of the cell phone while driv-
. When another Bluetooth® device is designed to provide reasonable protec- ing.
simultaneously connected, noise may tion against harmful interference in a . Do not make a phone call while
be heard in the voice coming from the residential installation. This equipment driving. When you have an in-
hands-free phone. may cause harmful interference to coming call, stop the vehicle in a
radio communications, if it is not safe location before taking the
! Corresponding profiles for the cell installed and used in accordance with incoming phone call. When you
phone the instructions. However, there is no have to absolutely take a phone
. HFP (Hands Free Profile): Ver. 1.0 guarantee that interference will not call, tell the caller “I’ll call you
. OPP (Object Push Profile): Ver. 1.1 occur in a particular installation. If this back”. And then call the caller
equipment does cause harmful inter- back after stopping the vehicle in
& Certification for the Hands- ference to radio or television reception, a safe location.
which can be determined by turning the
free system equipment off and on, the user is . Part 15 FCC Rules
NOTE encouraged to try to correct the inter- FCC Warning:
. This device complies with Part 15 of ference by one or more of the following Any unauthorized changes of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-Gen of IC measures. modifications to this equipment
Rules. Operation is subject to the – Reorient or relocate the receiving would void the user’s authority to
following two conditions: (1) This de- antenna. operate this device.
vice may not cause harmful interfer- – Increase the separation between
ence, and (2) this device must accept the equipment and receiver.
any interference received, including – Connect the equipment into an
interference that may cause undesired outlet on a circuit different from that
operation. to which the receiver is connected.
Changes or modifications not ex- – Consult the dealer or an experi-
pressly approved by the party respon- enced radio/TV technician for help.
sible for compliance could void the
Audio 5-35
CAUTION the vicinity. If there is detrimental & Using the Hands-free system
radio interference from this
. Do not leave the cell phone in the equipment to “other radio sta- ! Turning on/off the Hands-free mode
vehicle. The temperature in the tions”, move the equipment to
vehicle may become extremely another location as soon as
high and cause a malfunction of possible to avoid radio interfer-
the cell phone. ence. The frequency band used
. When using the cell phone, be by this equipment is in the 2.4
careful not to get it close to the GHz zone. The FH-SS modulation
in-vehicle equipment. Getting it is employed as a modulation
method. The expected inflicting
5
too close to the in-vehicle equip-
ment may result in deterioration interference distance is less than
in tone quality or a poor connect- 33 ft (10 m). This equipment uses
ing condition. a full band and can avoid a band
used by a movable body identifi-
. In the frequency band used by cation device.
this equipment, along with indus- 1) OFF hook switch
trial, scientific and medical 2) ON hook switch
equipment such as a microwave
oven, radio stations (a license is To turn on the Hands-free mode, press the
required) to be used by the OFF hook switch . To turn off the
production line in the factory to Hands-free mode, press the ON hook
identify movable bodies, specific switch .
small power radio stations (a ! Preparation for using the Hands-
license is not required) and ama- free system
teur radio stations (a license is Before using the Hands-free system, it is
required) are being operated. necessary to register a cell phone in the
(These three types of radio sta- system. Perform the following procedure
tions are hereinafter referred to to register a cell phone.
as “other radio stations”.) Before
1. Press the OFF hook switch .
using this equipment, be sure to
check to see if “other radio 2. Select “Set up” by operating the
stations” are being operated in “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
– CONTINUED –
5-36 Audio
Audio 5-37
– CONTINUED –
5-38 Audio
Audio 5-39
Go Back —
5
Redial — — Redialing
Callback — — Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory
*: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
– CONTINUED –
5-40 Audio
*: If a PIN code is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not available.
Audio 5-41
– CONTINUED –
5-42 Audio
Interior equipment
Interior light . The doors or the rear gate (Outback) & Map light
are unlocked using the remote keyless
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the entry transmitter.
lights are turned off to avoid battery . The ignition switch is turned from the
discharge. “Acc” position to the “LOCK” position.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the DOOR: The map lights illuminate auto- & Cargo area light (Outback)
lights are turned off to avoid battery matically in the following cases.
discharge. . Any of the doors (other than the rear
! Door interlock switch gate or trunk lid) is opened. The map lights
do not illuminate when only the rear gate
is opened.
. The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“Acc” position to the “LOCK” position.
The automatically illuminated map lights
remain on for several seconds and then 6
gradually turn off after all doors are
closed. While the lights are on, if any of 1) DOOR
the following operations are performed, 2) OFF
the map lights turn off immediately. 3) ON
1) Door interlock switch
. The ignition switch is turned from the
The cargo area light switch has three
“LOCK” position to the “Acc” or “ON”
Although the map light switches are in the positions.
position.
DOOR: The light illuminates only when
OFF position (manually off), the map lights . All doors are locked using the remote
can be set to illuminate automatically in the rear gate is opened.
keyless entry transmitter.
conjunction with a door opening, etc. by OFF: The light remains off.
use of the door interlock switch. The door The setting of the period for which the ON: The light remains on continuously.
interlock switch has the following two lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be
positions. changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact The automatically illuminated cargo area
your SUBARU dealer for details. light remains on for several seconds and
OFF: The map lights do not illuminate then gradually turns off after the rear gate
automatically in conjunction with a door is closed. While the light is on, if any of the
opening. But, the lights can be turned on following operations are performed, the
manually by pressing the map light cargo area light turns off immediately.
switches.
– CONTINUED –
. The ignition switch is turned from the Sun visors & Sun visor extension plate
“LOCK” position to the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. The rear gate is locked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
The setting of the period for which the
lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
your SUBARU dealer for details.
– CONTINUED –
& Glove box & Center console box To use as storage space:
! Center console box (front)
To use again as cup holders: ment and a lower compartment. ! Lower compartment
! Upper compartment
6
Insert the divider plate into the console 1) Lower compartment lock release
box.
1) Upper compartment lock release Pull up the lower compartment lock
! Center console box (rear) release to open the lower compartment.
Pull up the upper compartment lock
release to open the upper compartment.
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an
accident.
. Take care to avoid spills. Bev-
erages, if hot, might burn you or
your passengers. Spilled bev-
erages may also damage uphols-
To open the console, push on the lid lightly tery or carpets.
and it will automatically open. CAUTION
& Legacy
6
WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other
hard or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. If such items were hanging
on the coat hooks during deploy-
ment of the SRS curtain airbags, The coat hook is attached to each rear
they could cause serious injuries by passenger’s hand grip.
coming off the coat hooks and being A shopping bag hook is attached to each
thrown through the cabin or by inner side wall of the trunk near the trunk
preventing correct airbag deploy- lid opening.
ment. Before hanging clothing on
the coat hooks, make sure there are
no pointed objects in the pockets.
Hang clothing directly on the coat
hooks without using hangers.
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
side of the cargo area. Retaining pins are located on the driver’s
Make sure the driver’s floor mat is
To use the hook, push the upper portion side floor.
placed back in its proper location
and the shopping bag hook will appear. The floor mat is secured using the built-in and correctly secured on its retain-
grommets, by placing the grommets over ing pin. Also, do not use more than
the pins and pushing them downward. one floor mat. If the floor mat slips
forward and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during
driving, it could cause an accident.
– CONTINUED –
1. To open the lid, pull the handle up. 3. Remove the left and right parts of the
cargo floor lid. 1. To install the cover housing, insert
both ends of the cover housing into the
retainers.
cargo area cover behind the rear seat. Convenient tie-down hooks storing recesses.
(if equipped)
CAUTION
The convenient tie-down hooks are
designed only for securing light
cargo. Never try to secure cargo
that exceeds the capacity of the
hooks. The maximum load capacity
is 44 lbs (20 kg) per hook.
6
Outback
Hang the hook provided on the underside
of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to
keep the lid open. Outback
A rear view camera is attached to the may result in accident, fire or different rating may result in a
trunk lid (Legacy) or rear gate (Outback). electric shock. malfunction.
When the ignition switch is “ON” and the . If the rear view camera is used for
shift lever (MT models) or select lever (AT a long time while the engine is
or CVT models) is set to “R”, the rear view CAUTION not operated, the battery may
camera automatically displays the rear become completely discharged.
view image behind the vehicle on the . If your vehicle is washed with a
navigation monitor or on the inside mirror high-pressure washer, do not
depending on the model. allow water to contact the camera NOTE
directly. Entry of water in the
camera lens may result in con- . Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,
WARNING benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,
densation, malfunction, fire or
discoloration may occur. To remove
. Since the rear view camera uses electric shock.
contamination, wipe the camera with a 6
a wide-angle lens, the image on . Since the camera is a precision cloth moistened with a diluted neutral
the monitor is different from the device, do not subject it to strong detergent and then wipe it with a soft,
actual view in terms of distance. impacts. Otherwise, malfunction, dry cloth.
. Since the range of the image on fire or electric shock may occur. . When waxing the vehicle, be careful
the monitor is limited, you should . If mud or snow sticks to or is not to apply the wax to the camera. If it
always check the rear view and frozen on the camera, you must comes in contact with the camera,
the surrounding area with your be very careful removing it. moisten a clean cloth with a diluted
eyes and mirrors, and move Otherwise, damage done to the neutral detergent to remove the wax.
backward at a slow speed. Mov- camera may cause a fire or . The camera lens has hard coating to
ing backward only by checking electric shock. Pour water or help prevent scratches. However, when
the rear view image from the lukewarm water over the camera washing the vehicle or cleaning the
camera could cause an accident. to remove mud and ice, and wipe camera lens, be careful not to scratch
. Do not disassemble or modify the it with a soft, dry cloth. the camera lens. Do not use a washing
camera, switch or wiring. If . Do not put a flame close to the brush directly on the camera lens. The
smoke comes out or you smell camera or wiring. Otherwise, da- monitor screen may be adversely af-
a strange odor, stop using the mage or fire may occur. fected.
rear view camera immediately. . Strong light shined on the camera
. When replacing the fuse, be sure lens may develop white light stripes
Contact your SUBARU dealer
to use a fuse with the specified around the light source. This is not a
for an inspection. Continued use
rating. Use of a fuse with a
– CONTINUED –
malfunction. . It may be difficult to see the image of & Viewing range on the screen
. Under fluorescent lighting, the dis- the rearview camera in the following
play may flicker. However, this is not a cases. This is not a malfunction of the
malfunction. camera.
. The image of the rear view camera – The vehicle is in a dark place (at
may be slightly different from the night, in a tunnel, etc.).
actual color of the objects. – The vehicle is in an extremely hot
or cold place.
& How to use the rear view – An object (such as raindrops,
camera snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the
view of the rear view camera sticks
When the shift lever or select lever is set
to the lens of the camera.
to “R”, the rear view camera automatically
displays the rear view image from the – Strong light shined directly on
vehicle. When the lever is set to other the camera lens (occasionally, there
positions, the image before setting to “R” are vertical lines on the screen). Range of view
is displayed.
1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Set the shift lever or select lever to “R”.
NOTE
. For models with the genuine
SUBARU navigation system, the image
of the rear view camera has priority
over other screen displays. To operate
other screens, set the shift lever (MT
models) or select lever (AT and CVT
models) to a position other than “R”.
. The image of the rear view camera is Range of view
horizontally reversed as is the case
with the vehicle rearview mirror or the
side view mirror.
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly.
6
Image from camera Range of view
The area from the rear end of the bumper
can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the
bumper and areas just under the bumper
cannot be viewed.
Also, the image from the rear view camera
looks shorter than the actual distance.
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly. Image from camera
The area above the camera cannot be
viewed. If there is an object that has a
wide projection on its upper part such as a
sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
. When moving backward, always
check the back with your eyes
! When there is an upward slope at the ! When there is a downward slope at ! Feature of distance marker
back the back
1) 3 feet (1 m) line
1) 3 feet (1 m) 1) 3 feet (1 m) 2) 6.5 feet (2 m) line
3) 10 feet (3 m) line
The distance on the screen looks farther The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance. than the actual distance. The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or other object
NOTE close behind, distance cannot be correctly
When cargo is loaded, the rear view displayed.
distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance as in an
upward slope.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Black plate (13,1)
Fuel optimum engine performance and drive- damage the emission control system and
ability, it is required that you use premium may impair driveability and fuel economy.
grade unleaded gasoline. ! California fuel
CAUTION
NOTE If your vehicle was certified to California
Use of a fuel which is low in quality Be sure to use premium unleaded Emission Standards as indicated on the
or use of an inappropriate fuel gasoline of 91 AKI or higher for a turbo underhood tune-up label, it is designed to
additive may cause engine damage. engine model. If other gasoline (lower optimize engine and emission control
than 91 AKI) is used, knocking, re- system performance with gasoline that
duced output and poor accelerator meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-
& Fuel requirements response will result. fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in
any other state than California, your
! Non-turbo models ! Fuel octane rating vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
The non-turbo engine is designed to This octane rating is the average of the Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-
operate using unleaded gasoline with an Research Octane and Motor Octane side California is permitted to have higher
octane rating of 87 AKI or higher. numbers and is commonly referred to as sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-
mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter
! Turbo models the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
Using a gasoline with a lower octane and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or
The engine is designed to operate at smell. SUBARU recommends that you try
maximum performance using premium rating can cause persistent and heavy
knocking, which can damage the engine. a different brand of unleaded gasoline
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating having lower sulfur to determine if the
of 93 AKI or higher. If 93 AKI fuel is not Do not be concerned if your vehicle
sometimes knocks lightly when you drive problem is fuel related before returning
readily available in your area, unleaded your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI up a hill or when you accelerate. See your
dealer or a qualified service technician if service. The CHECK ENGINE warning
may be used with no detriment to engine light/malfunction indicator lamp may also
durability or driveability. However, you you use a fuel with the specified octane
rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or turn on. If this occurs, return to your
may notice a slight decrease in maximum authorized SUBARU dealer for diagnosis.
engine performance while using 91 AKI persistently.
If it is determined that the condition is
fuel. Use of 91 AKI fuel will not affect your ! Unleaded gasoline caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
warranty coverage. If premium unleaded The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed may not be covered by your warranty.
gasoline is not available, regular unleaded to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or nozzle. Under no circumstances should
higher may be temporarily used. For leaded gasoline be used because it will
! MMT need to add any fuel system cleaning Methanol can be used in your vehicle
Some gasoline contains an octane-en- agents to your fuel tank. ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy- mixture AND if it is accompanied by
Many gasolines are now blended with sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If materials called oxygenates. Use of these
you use such fuels, your emission control vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
system performance may deteriorate and Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal- use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol under these conditions.
function indicator lamp may turn on. If this (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in
happens, return to your authorized your vehicle, but should contain no more . If undesirable driveability problems are
SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the experienced and you suspect they may be
determined that the condition is caused proper operation of your SUBARU. fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not line before seeking service at your
be covered by your warranty. In addition, some gasoline suppliers are SUBARU dealer.
! Gasoline for cleaner air
now producing reformulated gasolines, . Fuel system damage or driveability
which are designed to reduce vehicle problems which result from the use of 7
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of improper fuel are not covered under the
CAUTION reformulated gasoline. SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con- you should ask your service station & Fuel filler lid and cap
taining alcohol may cause paint operators if their gasolines contain deter- ! Refueling
damage, which is not covered under gents and oxygenates and if they have
the SUBARU Limited Warranty. been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- Only one person should be involved in
sions. refueling. Do not allow others to approach
Your use of gasoline with detergent the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
additives will help prevent deposits from As additional guidance, only use fuels pipe while refueling is in progress.
forming in your engine and fuel system. suited for your vehicle as explained in the Be sure to observe any other precautions
This helps keep your engine in tune and following. that are posted at the service station.
your emission control system working . Fuel should be unleaded and have an
properly, and is a way of doing your part octane rating no lower than that specified
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a in this manual.
high quality fuel with the proper detergent . Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
and other additives, you should never sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
– CONTINUED –
1) Open
2. Open the fuel filler lid. 2) Close
CAUTION
Make sure that the cap is tightened
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
in the event of an accident.
mage to the fuel system. State emission testing (U.S. in order to meet their obligation under
. federal law to implement stricter vehicle
After refueling, turn the cap to the only) emission standards to reduce air pollution
right until it clicks to ensure that
it is fully tightened. If the cap is from vehicles. A dynamometer is a tread-
not securely tightened, fuel may WARNING mill or roller-like testing device that allows
leak out while the vehicle is being your vehicle’s wheels to turn while the
driven or fuel spillage could Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle vehicle remains in one place. Depending
occur in the event of an accident, must NEVER be performed on a on the severity of a state’s air pollution
creating a fire hazard. single two-wheel dynamometer. At- problems, the states must adopt either a
tempting to do so will result in “basic” or “enhanced” vehicle emission
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior uncontrolled vehicle movement and inspection test. Normally, a portion of the
surfaces of the vehicle. Because may cause an accident or injuries to basic emission test consists of an emis-
fuel may damage the paint, be persons nearby. sion inspector inserting an analyzer probe
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle
quickly. Paint damage caused by for a short period of time. States with more
spilled fuel is not covered under CAUTION severe air pollution problems are required
the SUBARU Limited Warranty. to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission
. Always use a genuine SUBARU Resultant vehicle damage due to test. This test simulates actual driving
fuel filler cap. If you use the improper testing is not covered conditions on a dynamometer and permits
wrong cap, it may not fit, and under the SUBARU Limited War- more accurate measurement of tailpipe
your fuel tank and emission con- ranty and is the responsibility of emitted pollution than the basic emission
trol system may be damaged. It the state inspection program or its test.
could also lead to fuel spillage contractors or licensees. The U.S. Environmental Protection
and a fire. Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
At state inspection time, remember to
. Immediately put fuel in the tank dynamometers in their emission testing
tell your inspection or service station in programs have EXEMPTED SUBARU
whenever the low fuel warning
advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the
light illuminates. Engine misfires
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam- testing program that involves a two-wheel
as a result of an empty tank
ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis- dynamometer.
could cause damage to the en-
sion damage will result.
gine.
There are some states that use four-wheel
Some states have started using dynam- dynamometers in their testing programs.
ometers in their state inspection programs When properly used, that equipment will
not damage an AWD SUBARU vehicle. not properly operating or there is one or Preparing to drive
Under no circumstances should the rear more diagnostic trouble codes stored in
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor vehicle’s computer with the “CHECK You should perform the following checks
should the driveshaft be disconnected for ENGINE” warning light/MIL illuminated. and adjustments every day before you
state emission testing. . A state emission inspection may reject start driving.
The EPA has issued regulations for (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of 1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
inspecting the On-Board Diagnostic OBD system readiness monitors “Not lights are clean and unobstructed.
(OBD) system as part of the state emis- Ready” is greater than one. Under this 2. Check the appearance and condition
sions inspection. The OBD system is condition, the vehicle operator should be of the tires. Also check tires for proper
designed to detect engine and transmis- instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few inflation.
sion problems that might cause vehicle days to set the monitors and return for an
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
emissions to exceed allowable limits. emission re-inspection.
leaks.
These inspections apply to all 1996 model . Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
4. Check that the hood, trunk (Legacy)
year and newer passenger cars and light should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of service.
and rear gate (Outback) are fully closed. 7
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
Columbia have implemented the OBD 6. Check the adjustment of the inside
system inspection. and outside mirrors.
. The inspection of the OBD system 7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
consists of a visual operational check of passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-
function indicator lamp (MIL) and an 8. Check the operation of the warning
examination of the OBD system with an and indicator lights when the ignition
electronic scan tool while the engine is switch is turned to the “ON” position.
running. 9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
. A vehicle passes the OBD system ing lights after starting the engine.
inspection if proper the “CHECK ENGINE”
warning light/MIL illumination is observed,
there is no stored diagnostic trouble
codes, and the OBD system readiness
monitors are complete.
. A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL is
– CONTINUED –
NOTE Starting the engine (1) Turn the ignition switch to the
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, “LOCK” position and wait for at least
washer fluid and other fluid levels & MT models 10 seconds. After checking that the
should be checked daily, weekly or at parking brake is applied, turn the
1. Apply the parking brake. ignition switch to the “START” position
fuel stops.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- while depressing the accelerator pedal
cessories. slightly (approximately a quarter of the
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor full stroke). Release the accelerator
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold pedal as soon as the engine starts.
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the engine. The starter motor will only the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
operate when the clutch pedal is de- position and wait for at least 10
pressed fully to the floor. seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” erator pedal and turn the ignition
position and check the operation of the switch to the “START” position. If the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to engine starts, quickly release the
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-9. accelerator pedal.
(3) If this does not start the engine,
CAUTION turn the ignition switch again to the
“LOCK” position. After waiting for 10
Do not operate the starter motor seconds or longer, turn the ignition
continuously for more than 10 sec- switch to the “START” position without
onds. If the engine fails to start after depressing the accelerator pedal.
operating the starter for 5 to 10
(4) If the engine still refuses to start,
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
more before trying again.
for assistance.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, perform the
following procedure.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
lights have turned off after the engine has position and check the operation of the erator pedal and turn the ignition
started. The fuel injection system auto- warning and indicator lights. Refer to switch to the “START” position. If the
matically lowers the idle speed as the “Warning and indicator lights” F3-9. engine starts, quickly release the
engine warms up. accelerator pedal.
CAUTION (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
NOTE (2.5 L non-turbo models) the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”
Do not operate the starter motor position. After waiting for 10 seconds
To protect the engine while the shift continuously for more than 10 sec- or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
lever is in the neutral position, the onds. If the engine fails to start after “START” position without depressing
engine is controlled so that the engine operating the starter for 5 to 10 the accelerator pedal.
speed may not become too high even if seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
the accelerator pedal is depressed (4) If the engine still refuses to start,
more before trying again.
hard. contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” 7
& AT and CVT models position without depressing the accelera-
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
CAUTION started. The fuel injection system auto-
after the engine has started.
matically lowers the idle speed as the
If you restart the engine while the If the engine does not start, perform the engine warms up.
vehicle is moving, shift the select following procedure.
lever into the “N” position. Do not (1) Turn the ignition switch to the While the engine is warming up, make
attempt to place the select lever of a “LOCK” position and wait for at least sure that the select lever is at the “P” or
moving vehicle into the “P” posi- 10 seconds. After checking that the “N” position and that the parking brake is
tion. parking brake is applied, turn the applied.
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal NOTE (2.5 L non-turbo and 3.6 L
1. Apply the parking brake. models)
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- full stroke). Release the accelerator To protect the engine while the select
cessories. pedal as soon as the engine starts. lever is in the “P” or “N” position, the
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N” (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn engine is controlled so that the engine
position (preferably “P” position). The the ignition switch back to the “LOCK” speed may not become too high even if
starter will only operate when the select position and wait for at least 10 the accelerator pedal is depressed
lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
– CONTINUED –
preconditions before starting, and if all transmitter is within the operating range of
safety parameters are correct, the engine the system.
will start within 5 seconds. Upon success-
ful engine start, the remote start confirma- & Remote start safety features
tion transmitter button will flash twice For safety and security reasons, the
every 5 seconds* and the vehicle will system will fail to start and honk the horn
honk the horn and flash the side marker twice or shut down the engine during
lights, tail lights and the front position remote start operation if any of the
lights once, then the lights will illuminate following occur:
and remain illuminated, indicating that the
engine is running. While the vehicle is . Any of the doors or the trunk / rear gate
operating via the remote engine start are open / opened (*the vehicle’s horn will
function, the power window features will honk six times and the side marker lights,
be disabled. Also, the system has a timer tail lights and the front position lights will
flash six times indicating that a vehicle
& Starting your vehicle and will shut down after 15 minutes if you
door or trunk / rear gate was open when 7
do not operate the vehicle. Press and hold
NOTE the “ ” button for 2 seconds to turn the the remote engine start system was
All vehicle doors, the engine hood and engine off. The remote start confirmation activated).
trunk / rear gate must be closed prior to transmitter button will flash three times* . The brake pedal is depressed
activating the remote engine start sys- indicating that the engine has shut down. . The key was already in the ignition
tem. Any open entry point will prevent If the starter cranks but does not start or switch
starting or cause the system to shut starts and stalls, the remote engine start . The engine hood is opened
down. system will power off and then attempt to . The remote start system “Service
The remote engine start function is acti- start the engine an additional three times mode” is engaged
vated by pressing the “ ” button twice unless the remote engine start system . The vehicle’s engine idle speed has
within 3 seconds on your remote engine determines that a vehicle malfunction is reached a level over 3,500 RPM
start transmitter. Upon successful activa- preventing the system from starting. If the . The alarm is triggered by opening a
tion the remote start confirming transmitter engine does not start after additional door or the rear gate.
button will flash once* and the vehicle will attempts, the remote engine start system
will abort and return to a non-activate . The select lever is not in the “P”
honk the horn and flash the side marker position (AT and CVT models)
lights, tail lights and front position lights state.
once. The system will check certain *: Provided that the remote engine start In addition to the items above, if the
– CONTINUED –
vehicle’s engine management system remote keyless entry transmitter will dis-
determines there is a safety risk due to a arm the alarm system. Refer to “Alarm
vehicle related problem, the vehicle will system” F2-15.
shut down and the vehicle’s horn will honk 2. Enter the vehicle.
three times. 3. The engine will shut down when any
NOTE door or trunk/rear gate is opened.
4. Insert the key into the ignition switch
. If the alarm system is armed at the
and turn to the “START” position to restart
time of remote engine start activation
the engine.
(the security indicator light on the
combination meter is flashing), the
alarm system will remain armed & Remote start confirmation
throughout the remote start run cycle. transmitter feature
. If the alarm system is disarmed at Your remote engine start transmitter is
the time of remote engine start activa- equipped with a unique bidirectional con-
tion (the security indicator light on the firmation feature. This feature will allow
combination meter is not flashing), the the transmitter’s backlit button to display
alarm system will remain disarmed the status of the system under the condi-
throughout the remote start run cycle. tion that the vehicle and transmitter are
within the operational range of the system.
& Entering the vehicle while it Typical transmitter button flash sequences
are outlined in the following chart.
is running via remote start
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
remote keyless entry system. If the vehi-
cle’s doors are unlocked manually using
the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will
trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior
to activating the remote engine start
system) and the engine will turn off.
Inserting the key into the ignition switch
and turning it to the “ON” position or
pressing the unlock button “ ” on the
– CONTINUED –
& Service mode & Remote transmitter program will flash one time.
In service mode, the remote engine start New transmitters can be programmed to 7. Repeat step 5 for any additional
function is temporarily disabled to prevent the remote engine start system in the transmitters (the system will accept up to
the system from unexpectedly starting the event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, eight transmitters).
engine while being serviced. damaged or additional transmitters are 8. The system will exit the transmitter
To engage or disengage service mode: desired (the system will accept up to eight learn mode if the key is turned to the
1. Enter the vehicle and close all vehicle transmitters). New remote engine start “LOCK” position, the door is closed or
doors and the trunk/rear gate. transmitters can be programmed accord- after 2 minutes.
2. Verify that the select lever is in the “P” ing to the following procedure.
position (AT and CVT models) 1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s & System maintenance
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal door must remain opened throughout the NOTE
entire process).
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” In the event that the vehicle’s battery is
position 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal. replaced, discharged or disconnected,
5. Press and release the remote engine 3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then it will be necessary to start the vehicle
start transmitter “ ” button three times. “LOCK”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”, then a minimum of one time using the key
The system will honk the vehicle’s horn back to “ON” again and leave the ignition prior to activating the remote engine
each time the button is pressed. “ON” throughout the programming pro- start system. This is required to allow
cess. the vehicle electronic systems to re-
6. The system will pause for 1 second
then honk the vehicle’s horn three times to 4. The system will flash the side marker synchronize.
indicate that the service mode has been lights, tail lights and front position lights
and honk the horn three times, indicating ! Changing the batteries
engaged or honk one time to indicate that
the service mode has been disengaged. that the system has entered the transmit-
ter learn mode. CAUTION
5. Press and release the “ ” button on
NOTE the transmitter that you want to program. . Do not let dust, oil or water get on
When taking your vehicle in for service, or in the remote engine start
6. The system will flash the side marker transmitter when replacing the
it is recommended that you inform the lights, tail lights and front position lights
service personnel that your vehicle is battery.
and honk the horn one time, indicating that
equipped with a remote engine start the system has learned the transmitter. . Be careful not to damage the
system. Upon successful programming, the re- printed circuit board in the re-
mote start confirmation transmitter button mote engine start transmitter
when replacing the battery.
NOTE
. This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful inter-
– CONTINUED –
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle Automatic transmission/Con- than 5 seconds in any position
speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
tinuously variable transmis- except the “N” or “P” position
or driving up steep hills, downshift to a when the brake is applied or
lower gear before the engine starts to sion when chocks are used in the
labor. wheels. This may cause the
The automatic transmission is electroni-
transmission fluid to overheat.
On steep downgrades, downshift the cally controlled and provides 5 forward
transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear speeds and 1 reverse speed. The con- . Avoid shifting from one of the
as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe tinuously variable transmission is electro- forward driving positions into the
speed and to extend brake pad life. nically controlled and provides an infinite “R” position or vice versa until
In this way, the engine provides a braking number of forward speeds and 1 reverse the vehicle has completely
effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use) speed. stopped. Such shifting may
the brakes while descending a hill, they Both the automatic transmission and cause damage to the transmis-
may overheat and not work properly. continuously variable transmission have sion.
a manual mode. . When parking the vehicle, first
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock securely apply the parking brake
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or WARNING and then place the select lever in
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This the “P” position. Avoid parking
phenomenon does not indicate a problem. Do not shift from the “P” or “N” for a long time with the select
position into the “D” or “R” position lever in any other position as
while depressing the accelerator doing so could result in a dead
pedal. This may cause the vehicle battery.
to jump forward or backward.
NOTE
CAUTION . For AT models, when the engine
coolant temperature is still low, the
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position
transmission will upshift to higher
only after the vehicle is comple-
engine speeds than when the coolant
tely stopped. Shifting while the
temperature is sufficiently high in order
vehicle is moving may cause
to shorten the warm-up time and
damage to the transmission.
improve driveability. The gearshift tim-
. Do not race the engine for more ing will automatically shift to the nor-
mal timing after the engine has warmed provides superior transmission effi- In this position, the transmission is me-
up. ciency for maximum fuel economy. At chanically locked to prevent the vehicle
. Immediately after transmission fluid times, depending on varying driving from rolling freely.
is replaced, you may feel that the conditions, a chain operating sound
transmission operation is somewhat may be heard that is characteristic of When you park the vehicle, first apply the
unusual. This results from invalidation this type of system. parking brake, then shift into the “P”
of data which the on-board computer position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the transmission.
has collected and stored in memory to & Select lever
allow the transmission to shift at the To shift the select lever from the “P” to any
most appropriate times for the current other position, you should depress the
condition of your vehicle. Optimized brake pedal fully then move the select
shifting will be restored as the vehicle lever. This prevents the vehicle from
continues to be driven for a while. lurching when it is started.
. When driving a vehicle that is
equipped with CVT under continuous NOTE 7
heavy load conditions such as towing a To protect the engine while the “P”
camper or climbing a long, steep hill, position is selected, the engine is
the engine speed or the vehicle speed controlled such that the engine speed
may automatically be reduced. This is may not become too high even if the
not a malfunction. This phenomenon accelerator pedal is depressed hard.
results from the engine control func-
tion maintaining the cooling perfor- ! R (Reverse)
: With the brake pedal depressed, shift
mance of the vehicle. The engine and while pressing the button in This position is for backing the vehicle.
vehicle speed will return to a normal : Shift while pressing the button in
speed when the engine is able to To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop
: Shift without pressing the button the vehicle completely then move the
maintain the optimum cooling perfor-
mance after the heavy load decreases. The select lever has four positions, “P”, lever to the “R” position.
Driving under a heavy load must be “R”, “N”, “D” and also has a manual gate ! N (Neutral)
performed with extreme care. Do not for using the manual mode.
This position is for restarting a stalled
try to pass a vehicle in front when ! P (Park) engine.
driving on an uphill slope while towing. In this position the wheels and transmis-
. The continuously variable transmis- This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the engine. sion are not locked. In this position, the
sion is a chain type system that
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
With the vehicle either moving or station- 3) Gear position indicator
ary, move the select lever from the “D”
position to the “M” position to select the When the manual mode is selected, the
manual mode. gear position indicator and upshift indica- Pull the “+” of the paddle shift to upshift
tor and/or downshift indicator on the one level. Also pull the “−” of the paddle
combination meter illuminate. The gear shift to downshift one level.
position indicator shows the currently
selected gear in the 1st-to-5th-gear range To deselect the manual mode, return the
(AT models) or 1st-to-6th gear range (CVT select lever to the “D” position from the “M”
models). The upshift and downshift indi- position.
cators show when a gearshift is possible. While driving with the select lever in the
When the upshift indicator “ ” is on, “D” position, if you change gears by
upshifting is possible. When the downshift paddle shifting, the gear position indicator
indicator “ ” is on, downshifting is possi- light illuminates and shows the current
ble. When both indicators are on, upshift- gear condition.
ing and downshifting are both possible.
When the vehicle stops (for example, at
traffic signals), the downshift indicator
CAUTION place and let the engine idle until the Power steering
warning light turns off.
Do not place or hang anything on
the paddle shift levers. Doing so & Driving tips CAUTION
may result in accidental gear shift-
ing. . On a road surface where there is a risk Do not hold the steering wheel at the
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or fully locked position left or right for
gravel-covered road), you can pull away more than 5 seconds. This may
NOTE from a standstill safely and easily by first damage the power steering pump.
Please read the following points care- selecting the 2nd gear of the manual
fully and bear them in mind when using mode. The power steering system operates only
the manual mode. . Always apply the foot or parking brake when the engine is running.
. If you attempt to shift down when when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or If you lose power steering assist because
the engine speed is too high, i.e., when “R” position. the engine stops or the system fails to
a downshift would push the tachometer . Always apply the parking brake when function, you can steer but it will take 7
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will parking your vehicle. Do not hold the much more effort.
be emitted to warn you that the down- vehicle with only the transmission.
shift is not possible. . Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
NOTE
. If you attempt to shift up when the position on an uphill grade by using the Right after the engine has been started
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis- “D” position. Use the brake instead. and before it has warmed up, you may
sion will not respond. . The engine may, on rare occasions, hear a noise coming from areas adja-
. You can perform a skip-shift (for knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler- cent to the power steering pump which
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. is located at the right-front area of the
the paddle switch twice in rapid suc- This phenomenon does not indicate a engine compartment. This noise is
cession. malfunction. normal. It does not indicate power
. The transmission automatically se- steering system trouble.
. A slight reduction in output torque may
lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops occur in the models with a 2.5 L turbo or
moving. 3.6 L engine before the engine warms up.
. If the temperature of the transmis-
sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT
OIL TEMP” warning light will illuminate.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
cate any malfunctions, and the brake ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- constant brake pedal pressure.
assist system is operating properly. Do not pump the brake pedal
tem)
. You might feel that the brake pedal since doing so may defeat the
is applied by lighter force and gener- operation of the ABS system.
ates a greater braking force. WARNING
. You might hear the sound of ABS The ABS system prevents the lock-up of
operating from the engine compart- Always use the utmost care in wheels which may occur during sudden
ment. driving – overconfidence because braking or braking on slippery road sur-
you are driving with an ABS faces. This helps prevent the loss of
equipped vehicle could easily lead steering control and directional stability
& Disc brake pad wear warning to a serious accident. caused by wheel lock-up.
indicators
When the ABS system is operating, you
CAUTION may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
7
. The ABS system does not always when the ABS operates.
decrease stopping distance. You
The ABS system will not operate when the
should always maintain a safe
vehicle speed is below approximately 6
following distance from other
mph (10 km/h).
vehicles.
. When driving on badly surfaced & ABS system self-check
roads, gravel roads, icy road, or
over deep newly fallen snow, You may feel a slight shock in the brake
stopping distances may be long- pedal and hear the operating sound of
er for a vehicle with the ABS ABS from the engine compartment just
system than one without. When after the vehicle is started. This is caused
The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
driving under these conditions, by an automatic functional test of the ABS
tors on the disc brakes give a warning
therefore, reduce your speed and system being carried out and does not
noise when the brake pads are worn.
leave ample distance from other indicate any abnormal condition.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
from the disc brakes while braking, im- vehicles.
mediately have your vehicle inspected by . When you feel the ABS system
the nearest SUBARU dealer. operating, you should maintain
– CONTINUED –
& ABS warning light – The warning light illuminates nated after the engine has been started,
when the ignition switch is but it turns off when the vehicle speed
turned to the “ON” position, reaches approximately 8 mph (12
but it does not turn off even km/h).
when the vehicle speed ex- . The warning light illuminates during
ceeds approximately 12 km/h driving, but it turns off immediately and
(8 mph). remains off.
– The warning light illuminates When driving with an insufficient battery
during driving. voltage such as when the engine is jump
– The warning light flashes. started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
. When the warning light is on (and and does not indicate a malfunction.
brake system warning light is When the battery becomes fully charged,
off), the ABS function shuts the light will turn off.
down; however, the conventional
The ABS warning light illuminates when brake system continues to oper-
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” ate normally.
position and turns off after approximately 2
seconds. . When the warning light is flash-
This is an indication that the ABS system ing, the ABS system may be
is working properly. malfunctioning. However, the
conventional brake system con-
CAUTION tinues to operate normally.
Electronic Brake Force Dis- & Steps to take if EBD system warning light illuminate simultaneously,
malfunctions take the following steps.
tribution (EBD) system
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
The EBD system maximizes the effective- flat place.
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear 2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.
brakes to supply a greater proportion of 3. Release the parking brake. If both
the braking force. It functions by adjusting warning lights turn off, the EBD system
the distribution of braking force to the rear may be malfunctioning.
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
loading condition and speed. dealer and have the system inspected.
The EBD system is an integral part of the 4. If both warning lights illuminate again
ABS system and uses some of the ABS and remain illuminated after the engine
system’s components to perform its func- has been restarted, shut down the engine
tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-
ing force. If any of the ABS components
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid”
7
used by the EBD function fails, the EBD If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, F11-28.
system also stops working. the system stops working and the brake 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
system warning light and ABS warning “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
When the EBD system is operating, you
light illuminate simultaneously. malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal The EBD system may be malfunctioning if nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
and does not indicate a malfunction. the brake system warning light and ABS system inspected.
warning light illuminate simultaneously 6. If the brake fluid level is below the
during driving. “MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven- Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
tional braking system will still function. nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are WARNING
applied harder than usual and the vehi-
cle’s motion may therefore become some- . Driving with the brake system
what harder to control. warning light on is dangerous.
If the brake system warning light and ABS This indicates your brake system
– CONTINUED –
may not be working properly. If Vehicle Dynamics Control that full vehicle control will be
the light remains on, have the system maintained at all times and under
brakes inspected by a SUBARU all conditions, its activation
dealer immediately. should be seen as a sign that
. If at all in doubt about whether WARNING the speed of the vehicle should
the brakes are operating prop- be reduced considerably.
erly, do not drive the vehicle. Always use the utmost care in . Whenever suspension compo-
Have your vehicle towed to the driving – overconfidence because nents, steering components, or
nearest SUBARU dealer for re- you are driving with a Vehicle Dy- an axle are removed from a
pair. namics Control system equipped vehicle equipped with the Vehicle
vehicle could easily lead to a ser- Dynamics Control system, have
ious accident. an inspection of that system
performed by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION
. The following precautions should
. Even if your vehicle is equipped be observed in order to ensure
with Vehicle Dynamics Control that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
system, winter tires should be trol system is operating properly.
used when driving on snow-cov- – All four wheels should be
ered or icy roads; in addition, fitted with tires of the same
vehicle speed should be reduced size, type, and brand. Further-
considerably. Simply having a more, the amount of wear
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- should be the same for all
tem does not guarantee that the four tires.
vehicle will be able to avoid
– Keep the tire pressure at the
accidents in any situation.
proper level as shown on the
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy- vehicle placard attached to
namics Control system is an the driver’s side door pillar.
indication that the road being
– Use only the specified tem-
travelled on has a slippery sur-
porary spare tire to replace a
face; since having Vehicle Dy-
flat tire. With a temporary
namics Control is no guarantee
– CONTINUED –
& Vehicle Dynamics Control through the ABS, whenever the ABS control systems.
system monitor stops operating due to a malfunc- The following situations could indicate a
tion in that electrical system, the malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning Vehicle Dynamics Control will also Control system. If any of these situations
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control op- become unable to control all four occur, have an authorized SUBARU deal-
eration indicator light brakes. Thus Vehicle Dynamics er carry out an inspection of the system at
Control system operation halts and the first available opportunity.
the warning light illuminates. . The warning light does not illuminate
Although both the Vehicle Dynamics when the ignition switch is turned to the
Control system and the ABS will be ON position.
inoperable in this situation, it will
still be possible to stop the vehicle . The warning light illuminates while the
using normal braking. The Vehicle vehicle is being driven.
Dynamics Control system and the NOTE
ABS do not adversely affect opera-
When the warning light turns on and off
tion of the vehicle in any way when
in the following way, it indicates that
they are inoperable. However
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
should such a situation occur, drive
is operating normally.
with care and have an authorized
SUBARU dealer carry out an inspec- . Although illuminating after the en-
The light illuminates when the ignition gine has been started, the warning light
switch is turned to the “ON” position and tion of those systems at the first
quickly turns off and remains off.
turns off several seconds after the engine available opportunity.
. The warning light illuminates when
has started. This lighting pattern indicates the vehicle is being driven, it then turns
that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
is operating normally.
NOTE off and remains off.
. When a malfunction has occurred in
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning ! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
the Vehicle Dynamics Control electrical
light indicator light
system, only the warning light will
illuminate. In such an event, the ABS The indicator light flashes during activa-
CAUTION will still be operating normally. tion of the skid suppression function and
. The warning light will also illuminate during activation of the traction control
Because the Vehicle Dynamics Con- when a problem occurs with the ABS or function.
trol system controls each brake Vehicle Dynamics Control electronic
Control system will be deactivated. When turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control Tire pressure monitoring
the switch is pressed again to reactivate system is activated, and the system
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the ignores any further pressing of the
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator switch. To make the switch usable
light turns off. again, turn the ignition switch to the
You should not deactivate the Vehicle “LOCK” position and restart the en-
Dynamics Control system except under gine.
the above-mentioned situations. . When the switch is pressed to
deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
CAUTION trol system, the vehicle’s running per-
formance is comparable with that of a
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
tem helps prevent unstable vehicle Dynamics Control system. Do not de-
motion such as skidding using con- activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
trol of the brakes and engine power. system except when absolutely neces-
Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics sary.
Control system unless it is abso- . Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
lutely necessary. If you must turn off The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
Control system is deactivated, compo-
the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- vides the driver with a warning message
nents of the brake control system may
tem, drive very carefully based on by sending a signal from a sensor that is
still activate. When the brake control
the road surface condition. installed in each wheel when tire pressure
system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-
is severely low.
namics Control operation indicator
light illuminates. The tire pressure monitoring system will
NOTE activate only when the vehicle is driven at
. When the switch has been pressed speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics this system may not react immediately to a
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
Control system automatically reacti- a blow-out caused by running over a
vates itself the next time the ignition sharp object).
switch is turned to the “LOCK” position
and the engine is restarted.
. If the switch is held down for 10
seconds or longer, the indicator light
Parking your vehicle & Electronic parking brake and contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
WARNING
CAUTION
. Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could . When the electronic parking
accidentally injure themselves or brake system has a malfunction
others through inadvertent op- and the parking brake cannot be
eration of the vehicle. Also, on applied, contact your SUBARU
hot or sunny days, the tempera- dealer immediately for an inspec-
ture in a closed vehicle could tion. If you have to park your
quickly become high enough to vehicle in such conditions, per-
cause severe or possibly fatal form the following procedure.
injuries to them.
1) Parking brake switch – Stop your vehicle in a flat
. Do not park the vehicle over 2) Hill Holder switch location.
flammable materials such as dry 3) Indicator light – Shift the shift lever in the “1”
grass, waste paper or rags, as or reverse position (MT mod-
they may burn easily if they come els).
near hot engine or exhaust sys- WARNING
– Shift the select lever in the “P”
tem parts. . Before exiting the vehicle, make position (AT or CVT models).
. Be sure to stop the engine if you sure that you turn off the engine. When the select lever cannot
take a nap in the vehicle. If Otherwise, the parking brake be shifted into the “P” posi-
engine exhaust gas enters the may be released and an accident tion, you must release shift
passenger compartment, occu- may occur. lock. Refer to “Shift lock func-
pants in the vehicle could die . If the brake system warning light tion” F7-20.
from carbon monoxide (CO) con- flashes, the electronic parking – Use tire stops under the tires
tained in the exhaust gas. brake system may be malfunc- to prevent the vehicle from
tioning. Immediately stop your moving.
vehicle in a safe location, use . Never drive while the parking
tire stops under the tires to brake is applied because this will
prevent the vehicle from moving
cause unnecessary wear on the without depressing the brake pedal or . The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.
brake linings. Before starting to the clutch pedal, the parking brake is
drive, always make sure that the not released. If the parking brake is automatically
parking brake has been released . When the parking brake is being released, the brake system warning light
and the brake system warning applied or released, noise may be and the indicator on the parking brake
light has turned off. noticed. However, this is not a malfunc- switch turn off.
tion.
. When the electronic parking brake
NOTE
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
parking brake. You can apply/release the system has a malfunction or the elec- Even if you have applied the parking
parking brake by operating the parking tronic parking brake operation is pro- brake by pressing the parking brake
brake switch. hibited temporarily, if the parking brake switch, the parking brake will be auto-
switch is operated, a chirp sound is matically released when the accelera-
To apply: Depress the brake pedal and heard and the brake system warning tor pedal is depressed.
press the parking brake switch firmly. light flashes. ! Hill Holder function
To release: Pull the parking brake switch . When you cannot release the park-
The electronic parking brake system has a
7
toward you while the ignition switch is in ing brake due to, for example, a system
the “ON” position and the brake pedal (all malfunction, you can release it by Hill Holder function. If the Hill Holder
models) and the clutch pedal (MT models) using the parking brake release tool. function is activated, the parking brake
are depressed. Refer to “Electronic parking brake – if will be automatically applied when stop-
the electronic parking brake cannot be ping on an uphill slope with the brake
When the parking brake is applied while pedal depressed. In this case, the brake
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, released” F9-16.
system warning light and the indicator light
the brake system warning light and the ! Automatic release function by ac- on the parking brake switch illuminate.
indicator light on the parking brake switch celerator pedal
illuminate. Refer to “Brake system warning NOTE
light” F3-17. The electronic parking brake system has
an automatic release function. The park- . The Hill Holder function may not
activate on a gentle uphill slope. In this
NOTE ing brake will be automatically released by
case, manually apply the electronic
. If the parking brake switch is pulled depressing the accelerator pedal. How-
ever, the automatic release function does parking brake.
with the ignition switch in the “Acc” or . If you do not depress the brake
“LOCK” position, the parking brake is not operate under the following conditions.
pedal sufficiently, the Hill Holder func-
not released. . Any door (other than the trunk lid or tion may not operate properly. How-
. If the parking brake switch is pulled rear gate) is open. ever, this is not a malfunction. When
– CONTINUED –
stopping on an uphill slope, depress the brake system warning light has . When you do not frequently use the
the brake pedal firmly and release it illuminated. Otherwise, the Hill parking brake when stopping on an uphill
after the brake system warning light Holder function may not operate slope
illuminates. properly and an accident may occur.
. Depending on the condition of the NOTE
road surface and braking force, the . If the Hill Holder switch is pressed
brakes operate temporarily and feel for more than 30 seconds, the Hill
different than usual. Holder indicator light turns off, the
. When the electronic parking brake brake system warning light flashes
system has a malfunction while the Hill and the system ignores any further
Holder function is activated, a chirp pressing of the switch. To activate the
sound is heard, the Hill Holder indica- switch again, turn the ignition switch to
tor light turns off and the brake system the “LOCK” position and restart the
warning light flashes. engine.
. The Hill Holder function does not . When the Hill Holder function is
reactivate when parking with the elec- deactivated while the Hill Holder func-
tronic parking brake released after the tion has a malfunction, if you press the
Hill Holder function is activated. If Hill Holder switch, a chirp sounds.
necessary, manually apply the electro- 1) Parking brake switch
nic parking brake. 2) Hill Holder switch ! Hill Holder indicator light
. If the seatbelt is not fastened when 3) Indicator light
the Hill Holder function is activated, the You can activate/deactivate the Hill Holder
vehicle may not start moving smoothly function by pressing the Hill Holder switch.
from a stop, or a noise may be heard
from the brake components. To activate: Press the Hill Holder switch.
To deactivate: Press the Hill Holder
! Hill Holder switch switch again.
WARNING Deactivate the Hill Holder function under
the following conditions.
When stopping on an uphill slope . When towing a trailer
with the Hill Holder function acti- . When carrying a heavy load
vated, release the brake pedal after
When the Hill Holder function is activated, ! Electronic parking brake system & Parking tips
the Hill Holder indicator light illuminates. warning When parking your vehicle, always per-
Refer to “Hill Holder indicator light” F3-19. form the following items.
! Emergency brake CAUTION . Apply the parking brake.
If the brake system warning light . For MT models, put the shift lever in the
CAUTION “1” (1st) for upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a
flashes, the electronic parking brake
system may be malfunctioning. Im- downgrade.
Use the emergency brake only in
case of an emergency. If the emer- mediately stop your vehicle in the . For AT and CVT models, put the select
gency brake is excessively used, nearest safe location and contact lever in the “P” (Park) position.
the brake parts will wear down your SUBARU dealer.
Never rely on the transmission alone to
faster or the brake may not work hold the vehicle.
sufficiently due to rear wheel brake If a malfunction occurs in the electronic
overheating. parking brake system, the brake system
warning light flashes. Refer to “Electronic 7
parking brake system warning” F3-19.
NOTE
While using the emergency brake, the
brake system warning light and the
indicator light on the parking brake
switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.
If the foot brake has a malfunction, you
can stop the vehicle by pressing the
parking brake switch continuously.
While applying the emergency brake, the
brake system warning light and the in- When parking on a hill, always turn the
dicator on the parking brake switch illumi- steering wheel as described here. When
nate and a chirp sounds. the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front
wheels should be turned away from the
curb.
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions.
These may cause loss of vehicle
When facing downhill, the front wheels control.
should be turned into the curb. . driving up or down a steep grade
. driving on slippery or winding
roads
. driving in heavy traffic
. towing a trailer 1. Press the “CRUISE” main switch
button.
NOTE
. If you press the “CRUISE” main
switch button while turning the ignition
switch “ON”, the cruise control func-
tion is deactivated and the cruise
control indicator light flashes. To re-
activate the cruise control function,
turn the ignition switch back to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, and then
turn it again to the “ON” position.
. Make sure the “CRUISE” main
vehicle speed when the button is vehicle speed and the set speed is less & Cruise control indicator light
pressed and the speed last time you than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
set is less than 4.4 km/h, the vehicle be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
speed will be lowered by 1 km/h. This pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the
occurs because the cruise control “SET” side quickly.
system regards this operation as that
intended to decrease the vehicle Canada-spec. models
speed. When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
! To decrease the speed (by the than 4.4 km/h, the set speed can be
“RES/SET” switch) lowered 1 km/h each time by pressing the
“RES/SET” switch to the “SET” side
quickly.
! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal) The cruise control indicator light illumi- 7
1. Depress the brake pedal to release nates when the ignition switch is turned to
cruise control temporarily. the “ON” position and turns off after
2. When the speed decreases to the approximately 3 seconds.
desired speed, press the “RES/SET” The light illuminates when the “CRUISE”
switch to the “SET” side once. Now the main switch is pressed.
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
keep running at that speed without de- NOTE
pressing the accelerator pedal. . If you press the “CRUISE” main
switch button while turning the ignition
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”
switch “ON”, the cruise control func-
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
tion is deactivated and the cruise
the desired speed. Then, release the
control indicator light flashes. To re-
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
activate the cruise control function,
will be memorized and treated as the new
turn the ignition switch back to the
set speed.
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, and then
U.S.-spec. models turn it again to the “ON” position.
When the difference between the actual . If this indicator light and the CHECK
– CONTINUED –
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the first Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-11
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2 Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2 Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-13
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3 and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-13
Roof rails with integrated crossbars
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4 (Outback) ........................................................ 8-14
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4 Trailer hitch (Outback — if equipped) .............. 8-16
Driving tips for AWD vehicles ............................ 8-5 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-17
Off road driving ................................................... 8-6 When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 8-18
Legacy................................................................ 8-6 Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-19
Outback .............................................................. 8-6 Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-19
Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8 Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-19
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8 Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-22
Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-9 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-23
Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-10 Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-24 8
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10
Tire chains ......................................................... 8-11
New vehicle break-in driving Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (carbon
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600 monoxide)
The following suggestions will help to save
km) your fuel.
The performance and long life of your . Select the proper gear position for the WARNING
vehicle are dependent on how you handle speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
tion. Always accelerate gently until you Engine exhaust gas contains
Follow these instructions during the first
reach the desired speed. Then try to carbon monoxide, a colorless
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
maintain that speed for as long as and odorless gas which is dan-
. Do not race the engine. And do not gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm possible.
except in an emergency. . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid . Always properly maintain the en-
racing the engine. gine exhaust system to prevent
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling. engine exhaust gas from enter-
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
ing the vehicle.
slow. . Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid . Keep the tires inflated to the correct . Never run the engine in a closed
acceleration, except in an emergency. pressure shown on the tire placard, which space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
. Avoid hard braking, except in an is located under the door latch on the
driver’s side. Low pressure will increase the vehicle in or out of it.
emergency.
tire wear and fuel consumption. . Avoid remaining in a parked
The same break-in procedures should be . Use the air conditioner only when vehicle for a long time while the
applied to a newly installed or overhauled necessary. engine is running. If that is
engine or when brake pads or brake . Keep the front and rear wheels in unavoidable, then use the venti-
linings are replaced with new ones. proper alignment. lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo. . Always keep the front ventilator
. The indication of the ECO gauge inlet grille free from snow, leaves
shows a reference for saving fuel. For or other obstructions to ensure
details, refer to “ECO gauge” F3-8. that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
3.6 L models
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
2.5 L non-turbo models
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
– CONTINUED –
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver- Periodic inspections Driving in foreign countries
ter:
. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a To keep your vehicle in the best condition When planning to use your vehicle in
small amount of leaded gasoline will at all times, always have the recom- another country:
damage the catalytic converter. mended maintenance services listed in . Confirm the availability of the correct
. Never start the engine by pushing or the maintenance schedule in the “War- fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-2.
pulling the vehicle. ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per- . Comply with all regulations and re-
. Avoid racing the engine. formed at the specified time or mileage quirements of each country.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while intervals.
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or incomplete combustion), have
your vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
Driving tips for AWD vehicles power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles vehicle and may affect ride, handling,
provide better traction when driving on braking, speedometer/odometer calibra-
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and tion, and clearance between the body
WARNING when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. and tires. It also may be dangerous and
By shifting power between the front and lead to loss of vehicle control.
. Always maintain a safe driving rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also . If you use a temporary spare tire to
speed according to the road and provide added traction during accelera- replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
weather conditions in order to tion, and added engine braking force original temporary spare tire stored in the
avoid having an accident on a during deceleration. vehicle. Using other sizes may result in
sharp turn, during sudden brak- Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle severe mechanical damage to the drive
ing or under other similar condi- may handle differently than an ordinary train of your vehicle.
tions. two wheel drive vehicle and it contains . Always check the cold tire pressure
. Always use the utmost care in some features unique to AWD. For safety before starting to drive. The recom-
driving – overconfidence be- purposes as well as to avoid damaging mended tire pressure is provided on the
cause you are driving an All- the AWD system, you should keep the tire placard, which is located on the door
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily following tips in mind: pillar on the driver’s side.
lead to a serious accident. . An AWD vehicle is better able to climb . There are some precautions that you 8
steeper roads under snowy or slippery must observe when towing your vehicle.
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. For detailed information, refer to “Towing”
There is little difference in handling, F9-12.
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
down a slope or turning corners, be sure
to reduce your speed and maintain an
ample distance from other vehicles.
. When replacing a tire, make sure you
use only the same size, circumference,
construction, brand, and load range as the
original tires listed on the tire placard.
Using other sizes, circumferences or
construction may result in severe mechan-
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine ical damage to the drive train of your
Off road driving under warranty. If you do take your . Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
SUBARU off road, you should review the sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
common sense precautions in the next over rough terrain.
WARNING section (applicable to the Outback) for . Slow down and employ extra caution at
general guidance. But please keep in all times. When driving off-road, you will
. Always maintain a safe driving mind that your vehicle’s off-road capabil- not have the benefit of marked traffic
speed according to the road and ities are more limited than those of the lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
weather conditions in order to Outback. the like.
avoid having an accident on a Never attempt to drive through pools and . Do not drive across steep slopes.
sharp turn, during sudden brak- puddles, or roads flooded with water. Instead, drive either straight up or straight
ing or under other similar condi- Water entering the engine air intake or down the slopes. A vehicle can much
tions. the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto more easily tip over sideways than it can
. Always use the utmost care in electrical parts may damage your vehicle end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
driving – overconfidence be- and may cause it to stall. down slopes that are too steep.
cause you are driving an All- . Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily & Outback cially at higher speeds.
lead to a serious accident. Because of the AWD feature and higher . Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
ground clearance, your SUBARU can be steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive
& Legacy please keep in mind that an AWD with your fingers and thumbs on the
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conven- SUBARU is a passenger car and is outside of the rim.
tional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain neither a conventional off-road vehicle . If driving through water, such as when
vehicle. It is a passenger car designed nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take crossing shallow streams, first check the
primarily for on-road use. The AWD your SUBARU off-road, certain common depth of the water and the bottom of the
feature gives it some limited off-road sense precautions such as those in the stream bed for firmness and ensure that
capabilities in situations in which the following list should be taken: the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly
driving surface is relatively level, obstruc- . Make certain that you and all of your and completely through the stream. The
tion-free and otherwise similar to on-road passengers are wearing seatbelts. water should be shallow enough that it
driving conditions. Operating it under other . Carry some emergency equipment, does not reach the vehicle’s undercar-
than those conditions could subject the such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel, riage. Water entering the engine air intake
vehicle to excessive stress which might wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or or the exhaust pipe or water splashing
result in damage not eligible for repair citizens band radio. onto electrical parts may damage your
vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never could be thrown around in the vehicle and nance Booklet”.
attempt to drive through rushing water; cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on
regardless of its depth, it can wash away the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s Remember that damage done to your
the ground from under your tires, resulting center of gravity and make it more prone SUBARU while operating it off-road and
in possible loss of traction and even to tip over. not using common sense precautions
vehicle rollover. . If you must rock the vehicle to free it such as those listed above is not eligible
. Always check your brakes for effec- from sand or mud, depress the accelerator for warranty coverage.
tiveness immediately after driving in sand, pedal slightly and move the shift lever/
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly select lever back and forth between “1”/
and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat “D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
that process several times to dry out the engine. For the best possible traction,
brake discs and brake pads. avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
. Do not drive or park over or near free the vehicle.
flammable materials such as dry grass or . When the road surface is extremely
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The slippery, you can obtain better traction by
exhaust system is very hot while the starting the vehicle with the transmission
engine is running and right after the in 2nd than 1st (both for MT, AT and CVT). 8
engine stops. This could create a fire For AT and CVT models, refer to “Selec-
hazard. tion of manual mode” F7-22.
. After driving through tall grass, mud, . Never equip your vehicle with tires
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there larger than those specified in this manual.
is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, . Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the road driving. Suspension components are
underbody. Clear off any such matter from particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
the underbody. If the vehicle is used with need to be washed thoroughly.
these materials trapped or adhering to the . Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
underbody, a mechanical breakdown or under hard-driving conditions such as
fire could occur. rough roads or off roads will necessitate
. Secure all cargo carried inside the more frequent replacement of engine oil,
vehicle and make certain that it is not brake fluid and transmission oil than that
piled higher than the seatbacks. During specified in the maintenance schedule
sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo described in the “Warranty and Mainte-
Winter driving Forcing a frozen door open may damage washer nozzles by operating the washer
or separate the rubber weather strips for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
around the door. If the door is frozen, the concentration of the fluid remaining in
use hot water to melt the ice, and after- the piping is too low for the outside
wards thoroughly wipe the water away. temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use CAUTION
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of . Adjust the washer fluid concen-
the vehicle. tration appropriately for the out-
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con- side temperature. If the concen-
tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% tration is inappropriate, sprayed
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- washer fluid may freeze on the
perature varies according to how much it windshield and obstruct your
is diluted, as indicated in the following view, and the fluid may freeze in
& Operation during cold table. the reservoir tank.
weather
. State or local regulations on
Carry some emergency equipment, such Washer Fluid Con-
centration Freezing Temperature volatile organic compounds may
as a window scraper, a bag of sand, restrict the use of methanol, a
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables. 30% 10.48F (−128C) common windshield washer anti-
Check the battery and cables. Cold 50% −48F (−208C) freeze additive. Washer fluids
temperatures reduce battery capacity. containing non-methanol anti-
100% −498F (−458C) freeze agents should be used
The battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter only if they provide cold weather
In order to prevent freezing of washer
starts. protection without damaging
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
Use an engine oil of proper grade and the table above when adjusting the fluid
or washer system.
viscosity for cold weather. Heavy summer concentration to the outside temperature.
oil will cause harder starting. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one ! Before driving your vehicle
Keep the door locks from freezing by used previously, purge the old fluid from Before entering the vehicle, remove any
squirting them with deicer or glycerin. the piping between the reservoir tank and snow or ice from your shoes because that
could make the pedals slippery and 2. Use tire stops under the tires to & Driving on snowy and icy
driving dangerous. prevent the vehicle from moving. roads
While warming up the vehicle before When the vehicle is parked in snow or WARNING
driving, check that the accelerator pedal, when it snows, raise the wiper blades off
brake pedal, and all other controls operate the glass to prevent damage to them. Do not use the cruise control on
smoothly. slippery roads such as snowy or icy
When the vehicle has been left parked
Clear away ice and snow that has after use on roads heavily covered with roads. This may cause loss of
accumulated under the fenders to avoid snow, or has been left parked during a vehicle control.
making steering difficult. During severe snowstorm, icing may develop on the
winter driving, stop when and where it is brake system, which could cause poor
safe to do so and check under the fenders
CAUTION
braking action. Check for snow or ice
periodically. buildup on the suspension, disc brakes Avoid prolonged continuous driving
! Parking in cold weather and brake hoses underneath the vehicle. in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, engine’s intake system and may
WARNING being careful not to damage the disc hinder the airflow, which could re-
brakes and brake hoses and ABS har- sult in engine shutdown or even 8
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust ness. breakdown.
gases under your vehicle. Keep ! Refueling in cold weather
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and To help prevent moisture from forming in To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
from around your vehicle if you park the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
the vehicle in snow with the engine use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel speed driving, and sharp turning when
running. tank is recommended during cold weather. driving on snowy or icy roads.
Use only additives that are specifically Always maintain ample distance between
Do not use the parking brake when your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
parking for long periods in cold weather designed for this purpose. When an
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts to avoid the need for sudden braking.
since it could freeze in that position. To supplement the foot brake, use the
Instead, you should observe the following longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty. engine brake effectively to control the
tips. vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for MT If your SUBARU is not going to be used when necessary.)
models, or the select lever in “P” for AT for an extended period, it is best to have Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
models and CVT models. the fuel tank filled to capacity. vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
– CONTINUED –
leading to loss of vehicle control. despite wiper operation, use the defroster NOTE
with the airflow selection in “ ” and the When the season requiring non-freez-
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en- temperature set for maximum warmth.
hances your vehicle’s braking perfor- ing type wiper blades is over, replace
After the windshield gets warmed enough them with standard wiper blades.
mance on snowy and icy roads. For to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away
information about braking on slippery using the windshield washer. Refer to
surfaces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake “Windshield washer” F3-33. & Corrosion protection
System)” F7-25 and “Vehicle Dynamics Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.
Control system” F7-28. Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
! Wiper operation when snowing
wiper from working effectively. If snow is & Snow tires
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
Before driving in cold weather, make sure a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
the wiper blades are not frozen to the the vehicle at road side, use the hazard WARNING
windshield or rear window. warning flasher to alert other drivers. . When replacing original tires with
If the wiper blades are frozen to the Refer to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-5. winter (snow) tires, make sure
windshield or rear window, perform the you use only the same size,
following procedure. We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the construction and load range as
. To thaw the windshield wiper blades, the original tires listed on the tire
seasons you could have snow and freez-
use the defroster with the airflow selection placard. Using other sizes and
ing temperatures. Blades of this type give
in “ ” and the temperature set for construction may affect speed-
superior wiping performance in snowy
maximum warmth until the wiper blades ometer/odometer calibration and
conditions. Be sure to use blades that
are completely thawed. Refer to “Climate clearance between the body and
are suitable for your vehicle.
control” F4-1. tires. It also may be dangerous
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper CAUTION and lead to loss of vehicle con-
deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the trol.
windshield wiper blades. Refer to “Defog- During high-speed driving, non- . You must install four winter tires
ger and deicer” F3-34. freezing type wiper blades may not that are of the same size, circum-
. To thaw the rear wiper blade, use the perform as well as standard wiper ferences, construction, brand,
rear window defogger. Refer to “Defogger blades. If this happens, reduce the and load range. Mixing other
and deicer” F3-34. vehicle speed. sizes, circumferences or con-
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts structions may result in severe
to stick on the surface of the windshield mechanical damage to the drive
& Vehicle capacity weight side door pillar. It includes the total weight load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-
of the driver and all passengers and their pending on the situation.
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, In addition, the total weight applied to
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross vehicle.
Vehicle Weight Rating and Even if the total weight of your luggage is
Gross Axle Weight Rating) lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
8
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a
vehicle scale, found at a commercial
weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower
Certification label load range than the originals because they
The certification label attached to the may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
driver’s side door shows GVWR (Gross tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross range than the originals do not increase
Axle Weight Rating). the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
The load capacity of your vehicle is The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
determined by weight, not by available never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
cargo space. The maximum load you can combined total of weight of the vehicle,
carry in your vehicle is shown on the fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s optional equipment and trailer tongue
– CONTINUED –
& Roof rails with integrated the maximum load limit. Over- ! Installing carrying attachments on
crossbars (Outback) loading may cause damage to the crossbars
the vehicle and create a safety When installing any carrying attachment
hazard. such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-
The bars can be used as crossbars. bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
Cargo can be carried after setting the tions and make sure that the attachment is
bars as crossbars and installing the securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
genuine SUBARU carrying attachment. genuine SUBARU attachments. A set of
When you carry cargo on the roof using the crossbars is designed to carry loads
the crossbars and a carrying attachment, (cargo and attachment) of not more than
never exceed the maximum load limit the allowable load limit described in the
explained in the following. You should Owner’s Manual of a genuine SUBARU
also be careful that your vehicle does not carrying attachment. Before operating the
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating vehicle, make sure that the cargo is
1) Integrated crossbars (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle properly secured on the attachment.
Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle,
NOTE
CAUTION . Remember that the vehicle’s center
refer to “Loading your vehicle” F8-12. The
. For cargo carrying purposes, the maximum load limit of the cargo and of gravity is altered with the weight of
bars must be used as crossbars carrying attachment must not exceed the the load on the roof, thus affecting the
and be used together with the allowable load limit described in the Own- driving characteristics. Drive carefully,
genuine SUBARU carrying at- er’s Manual of a genuine SUBARU carry- avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and
tachment. The bars must never ing attachment. Place the heaviest load at abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be
be used alone to carry cargo. the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly increased.
Otherwise, damage to the roof or distribute the cargo. Always properly . Restore the bars to the original
paint or a dangerous road hazard secure all cargo. position when the bars are not used
due to loss of cargo could result. as crossbars.
. When using the bars as cross-
bars, make sure that the total
weight of the carrying attach-
ment and cargo does not exceed
CAUTION
. Do not raise the bar higher than
necessary. The base of the bar
may be damaged.
. Be careful not to contact the bars
while sliding them. Otherwise,
the bars may be scratched or
the latch portions may be da-
maged.
. Do not slide the bar more than
necessary when sliding the bar. 1. Pull out the integrated crossbars from 3. Install the bars into the holders.
The base of the bar may be the roof rail holders by pulling up the 4. Make sure that the latches are fitted
damaged. covers. securely.
. Do not allow the bar to fall on or 8
contact the roof panel or the ! How to re-stow bars
moonroof when sliding the bar.
Otherwise the roof panel may be CAUTION
dented or the glass of the moon-
Do not use the bars as roof rails
roof may be damaged.
when the bars are stowed.
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
. Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
weight could cause an accident
resulting in serious personal in-
juries. Permissible trailer weight
changes depending on the situa-
1. Pull out the crossbars from the roof rail 3. Install the bars into the holders. tion. For possible recommenda-
holders by pulling up the covers. 4. Make sure that the latches are fitted tions and limitations, refer to
securely. “Trailer towing” F8-19.
. Trailer brakes are required when
the towing load exceeds 1,000
lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer
has safety chains and that each
chain will hold the trailer’s max-
imum gross weight. Towing trai-
lers without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if
the trailer separates from the
hitch due to coupling damage or
hitch ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin
2. Slide the bars in the direction shown in and safety pin for positive lock-
the illustration. ing placement before towing a
trailer. If the ball mount comes off
the hitch receiver, the trailer
– CONTINUED –
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate & When you do not tow a trailer
for the ball mount and your trailer. The . Remove the ball mount from the hitch
hitch ball must be securely installed on the receiver tube and insert the receiver cover
ball mount. onto the hitch receiver tube.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball. . Place the dust cap over the four-pin
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with connector of the hitch wire harness to
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s protect against possible damage.
maximum gross weight. The chains . Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
should cross under the trailer tongue to four-pin connector using terminal grease.
prevent the tongue from dropping onto the
ground in case it should disconnect from
the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the
chains taking tight turn situations into
account; however, be careful not to let Hitch harness connector
them drag on the ground. 8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black
four-pin wire connector to the towing
WARNING trailer’s wire harness.
Do not connect safety chains to part 9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
of the vehicle other than the safety wire harness by individually activating the
chain hooks. brake, stop and turn signal lights on the
trailer.
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire har-
ness before launching or retrieving a
watercraft.
Certification label
– CONTINUED –
trailer. Regularly check that the hitch mounting dealer and professional trailer supplier for
bolts and nuts are tight. more information about the trailer’s brake
! Outback
system.
The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer & Connecting a trailer ! Trailer safety chains
hitch is recommended. A genuine
SUBARU hitch is available from your ! Trailer brakes
SUBARU dealer. WARNING
If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid- WARNING Always use safety chains between
able, be sure the hitch is suited to your your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
vehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes- . Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its trailer without safety chains could
sional hitch supplier to assist you in create a traffic safety hazard if the
choosing an appropriate hitch for your cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight. trailer separates from the hitch due
vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch to coupling damage or hitch ball
manufacturer’s instructions for installation . Do not directly connect your damage.
and use. trailer’s hydraulic brake system
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the to the hydraulic brake system in In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
your vehicle. Direct connection
rear bumper. The bumper is not designed
to handle that type of load. would cause the vehicle’s brake
ball should break or become discon- 8
nected, the trailer could get loose and
For all types of hitches, regularly check performance to deteriorate and create a traffic safety hazard.
that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are could lead to an accident. For safety, always connect the towing
tight. vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
! Legacy plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
chains. Pass the chains crossing each
SUBARU does not offer accessory trailer other under the trailer tongue to prevent
(453 kg), the trailer is required to be the trailer from dropping onto the ground
hitches. Consult with a professional hitch equipped with its own brake system. in case the trailer tongue should discon-
supplier to assist you in choosing an Electric brakes or surge brakes are nect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient
appropriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure recommended, and must be installed slack in the chains taking tight turn
to follow all of the hitch manufacturer’s properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes situations into account; however, be care-
instructions for installation and use. conform with Federal, state/province and/ ful not to let them drag on the ground.
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the or other applicable regulations. Your
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed For more information about the safety
rear bumper. The bumper is not designed
to handle that type of load. to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic chain connection, refer to the instructions
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU for your hitch and trailer.
– CONTINUED –
! Side mirrors Connection of trailer lights to your vehi- road service to repair the flat tire.
cle’s electrical system requires modifica-
tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
increase its capacity and accommodate vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare
are connected properly, please consult tire is firmly secured.
your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper
operation of the turn signals and the brake & Trailer towing tips
lights each time you hitch up.
CAUTION
! Tires
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
WARNING when towing a trailer in hilly
country on hot days.
Never tow a trailer when the tem-
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, porary spare tire is used. The tem- . When towing a trailer, steering,
check that the standard side mirrors porary spare tire is not designed to stability, stopping distance and
provide a good rearward field of view sustain the towing load. Use of the braking performance will be dif-
without significant blind spots. If significant temporary spare tire when towing ferent from normal operation. For
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan- can result in failure of the spare tire safety’s sake, you should employ
dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that and/or less stability of the vehicle. extra caution when towing a
conform with Federal, state/province and/ trailer and you should never
or other applicable regulations. Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle speed. You should also keep the
! Trailer lights are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires” F12- following tips in mind:
7 and in “GAS STATION REFERENCE” at
CAUTION the end of this manual. ! Before starting out on a trip
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and . Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-
Direct splicing or other improper hitch mounting are in good condition. If
connection of trailer lights may proper inflation pressure should be in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s any problems are apparent, do not tow the
damage your vehicle’s electrical trailer.
system and cause a malfunction of specifications.
. Check that the vehicle sits horizontally
your vehicle’s lighting system. In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial tipped sharply up at the front and down at
the rear, check the total trailer weight, ! Driving with a trailer
GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then . You should allow for considerably more
confirm that the load and its distribution stopping distance when towing a trailer.
are acceptable. Avoid sudden braking because it may
. Check that the tire pressures are result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
correct. control.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are . Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-
connected properly. Confirm that erations. If your vehicle has a manual
– the trailer tongue is connected transmission, always start out in first gear
properly to the hitch ball. and release the clutch at moderate engine
– the trailer lights connector is con- revolution.
nected properly and trailer’s brake . Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
lights illuminate when the vehicle’s rapid lane changes. 1) Left turn
brake pedal is pressed, and that the . Slow down before turning. Make a 2) Right turn
trailer’s turn signal lights flash when longer than normal turning radius because
the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper- the trailer wheels will be closer than the . Backing up with a trailer is difficult and
ated. vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In takes practice. When backing up with a 8
– the safety chains are connected a tight turn, the trailer could hit your trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.
properly. vehicle. When turning back, grip the bottom of the
– all cargo in the trailer is secured . Crosswinds will adversely affect the
steering wheel with one hand and turn it to
safety in position. the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right
handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
– the side mirrors provide a good for a right turn.
ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
rearward field of view without a sig- weather conditions or the passing of large . If the ABS warning light illuminates
nificant blind spot. trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn grip the steering wheel and slow down the trailer and have repairs performed
the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination immediately but gradually. immediately by the nearest SUBARU
before starting out on a trip. In an area free dealer.
. When passing other vehicles, consid-
of traffic, practice turning, stopping and erable distance is required because of the ! Driving on grades
backing up. added weight and length caused by . Before going down a steep hill, slow
attaching the trailer to your vehicle. down and shift into lower gear (if neces-
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
– CONTINUED –
engine braking effect and prevent over- – “AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT and
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not CVT models)” F3-15
make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the . For AT and CVT models, avoid using
air conditioner may turn off automatically the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on
to protect the engine from overheating. an uphill slope instead of using the
parking brake or foot brake. That may
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay cause the transmission fluid to overheat.
attention to the coolant temperature high
warning light (for all models) and AT OIL ! Parking on a grade
TEMP warning light (for AT and CVT Always block the wheels under both
models) because the engine and trans- vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
mission are relatively prone to overheating the parking brake. You should not park on
under these conditions. If the coolant a hill or slope. But if parking on a hill or
temperature high warning light and/or the slope cannot be avoided, you should take
AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates, the following steps:
immediately turn off the air conditioner and 1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
stop the vehicle in the nearest safe down.
location. For further instructions and addi- 2. Have someone place wheel blocks
tional information, refer to the following under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
sections.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
– “If you park your vehicle in an release the regular brakes slowly until the
emergency” F9-2 blocks absorb the load.
– “Engine overheating” F9-12
4. Apply the regular brakes and then
– “Coolant temperature low indicator apply the parking brake; slowly release
light/Coolant temperature high warn- the regular brakes.
ing light” F3-13
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT
models) or “P” (AT and CVT models) and
shut off the engine.
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in an emergency......... 9-2 If no steam is coming from the engine
Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2 compartment ................................................... 9-12
Maintenance tools ............................................... 9-3 Towing ................................................................ 9-12
Legacy................................................................ 9-4 Towing and tie-down hooks/holes ...................... 9-13
Outback .............................................................. 9-5 Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-15
Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-15
Flat tires............................................................... 9-6
Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-6 Electronic parking brake – if the electronic
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) parking brake cannot be released................. 9-16
(if equipped)...................................................... 9-9 Trunk lid (Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot
Jump starting ..................................................... 9-10 be opened ....................................................... 9-18
How to jump start............................................... 9-10 Rear gate (Outback) – if the rear gate
Engine overheating ............................................ 9-12 cannot be unlocked ........................................ 9-19
If steam is coming from the engine Moonroof – if moonroof cannot be closed ...... 9-19
compartment.................................................... 9-12
Check the inflation pressure of the tem- . When the wear indicator appears on
porary spare tire periodically to keep the the tread, replace the tire.
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is . The temporary spare tire must be used
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2). only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire 9
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
When using the temporary spare tire, note rear wheel and install the temporary spare
the following precautions. tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
is reduced.
– CONTINUED –
& Legacy 5) Tool bucket the floor cover of the trunk. The electronic
parking brake release tool is stored under
the floor of the trunk. The other tools are
stored in the tool bucket that is located in
the recess of the spare tire wheel.
For the method to use the jack, refer to
“Flat tires” F9-6.
For the method to use the electronic
parking brake release tool, refer to “Elec-
tronic parking brake – if the electronic
parking brake cannot be released” F9-16.
& Outback 5) Tool bucket area. The electronic parking brake release
tool is stored under the floor of the cargo
area. The other tools are stored in the tool
bucket that is located in the recess of the
spare tire wheel.
For the method to use the jack, refer to
“Flat tires” F9-6.
For the method to use the electronic
parking brake release tool, refer to “Elec-
tronic parking brake – if the electronic
parking brake cannot be released” F9-16.
Flat tires . Always turn off the engine before 5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
raising the flat tire off the ground wheel nut wrench.
If you have a flat tire while driving, never using the jack. Never swing or The tools and the spare tire are stored
brake suddenly; keep driving straight push the vehicle supported with under the floor of the trunk (Legacy) or the
ahead while gradually reducing speed. the jack. The jack can come out cargo area (Outback). Refer to “Mainte-
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe of the jacking point due to a jolt nance tools” F9-3.
place. and this can result in a serious
accident. NOTE
& Changing a flat tire Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when- cated before using it.
WARNING ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake and shift the
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an shift lever in reverse (MT models) or the
incline or a loose road surface. select lever in the “P” (Park) position (AT
The jack can come out of the and CVT models).
jacking point or sink into the 3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
ground and this can result in a and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
serious accident.
. Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle. The jack supplied
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while support-
ing the vehicle with this jack. Legacy
Outback 7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the nut wrench but do not remove the nuts. head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
the spare tire out.
NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
9
is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
“Temporary spare tire” F9-2 and
strictly follow the instructions.
8. Place the jack under the side sill at the 9. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat screw, and turn the handle until the tire
tire. clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
– CONTINUED –
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand. on the wrench because you may exceed
tire. the specified torque. Have the wheel nut
WARNING torque checked at the nearest automotive
service facility.
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts when the spare
tire is installed. This could cause the
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
WARNING activate only when the vehicle is driven. being transferred, the low tire pres-
Also, this system may not react immedi- sure warning light will illuminate
Never place a tire or tire changing ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for steadily after blinking for approxi-
tools in the passenger compartment example, a blow-out caused running over mately one minute. This indicates
after changing wheels. In a sudden a sharp object). the TPMS is unable to monitor all
stop or collision, loose equipment four road wheels. Contact your
could strike occupants and cause WARNING SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
injury. Store the tire and all tools in for tire and sensor replacement and/
If the low tire pressure warning light or system resetting.
the proper place.
illuminates while driving, never
brake suddenly and keep driving Do not inject any tire liquid or
straight ahead while gradually redu- aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
& Tire pressure monitoring cing speed. Then slowly pull off the as this may cause a malfunction of
system (TPMS) (if equipped) road to a safe place. Otherwise an the tire pressure sensors.
accident involving serious vehicle If the light illuminates steadily after
damage and serious personal injury blinking for approximately one min-
could occur. ute, promptly contact a SUBARU
Check the pressure for all four tires dealer to have the system inspected.
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on the vehicle 9
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side. If this light still illumi-
nates while driving after adjusting
the tire pressure, a tire may have
significant damage and a fast leak
that causes the tire to lose air
rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- it with a spare tire as soon as
vides the driver with the warning message possible.
indicated by sending a signal from a When a spare tire is mounted or a
sensor that is installed in each wheel wheel rim is replaced without the
when tire pressure is severely low. original pressure sensor/transmitter
The tire pressure monitoring system will
Jump starting eye protectors, and remove metal & How to jump start
objects such as rings, bands or
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
other metal jewelry.
volts and the negative terminal is
WARNING . Be sure the jumper cables and grounded.
clamps on them do not have
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. 2. If the booster battery is in another
loose or missing insulation. vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the . Do not jump start unless cables 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
vehicle. in suitable condition are avail- accessories.
able. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
If battery fluid gets on you,
thoroughly flush the exposed . A running engine can be danger- the sequence illustrated.
area with water immediately. Get ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
medical help if the fluid has clothing, hair and tools away
entered your eyes. from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
If battery fluid is accidentally
Removing rings, watches and
swallowed, immediately drink a
ties is advisable.
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical . Jump starting is dangerous if it is
help. done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
Keep everyone including chil-
for jump starting, consult a com-
dren away from the battery.
petent mechanic.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is When your vehicle does not start due to a
brought near it. Do not smoke or run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
light a match while jump starting. may be jump started by connecting your
. Never attempt jump starting if the battery to another battery (called the
discharged battery is frozen. It booster battery) with jumper cables.
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around
a battery, always wear suitable
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hooks and tie-down hooks/holes.
Never use suspension parts or
other parts of the body for towing
or tie-down purposes.
. Never use the tie-down hole clo- 2. Pry off the cover on the front bumper
sest to the muffler under the using a screwdriver, and you will find a 4. Tighten the towing hook securely
vehicle for towing purposes. threaded hole for attaching the towing using the jack handle.
hook.
. To prevent deformation to the After towing, remove the towing hook from
bumper and the towing hook, do the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
not apply excessive lateral load Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper. 9
to the towing hooks.
WARNING
Front towing hook:
1. Take out the towing hook and screw- . Do not use the towing hook
driver from the on board tool bucket. Take except when towing your vehicle.
out the jack handle from the trunk (Le- . Be sure to remove the towing
gacy) or cargo area (Outback). hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
threaded hole until the threads can no
– CONTINUED –
Rear towing hook: After towing, remove the towing hook from
1. Take the towing hook out of the tool the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
bucket and take the screwdriver out of the Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
tool bucket. Take the jack handle out of
the trunk (Legacy) or cargo area (Out- WARNING
back).
Do not use the towing hook except
when towing your vehicle.
Rear tie-down holes: WARNING properly with safety chains. Each safety
chain should be equally tightened and
Use the rear tie-down holes only for care must be taken not to pull the chains
downward anchoring. If they are so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip out & Towing with all wheels on the
of the holes, possibly causing a ground
dangerous situation.
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
This is the best way to transport your the “LOCK” position while the
vehicle. Use the following procedures to vehicle is being towed because
ensure safe transportation. the steering wheel and the direc-
1) Rear tie-down hole
1. Shift the select lever into the “P” tion of the wheels will be locked.
The rear tie-down holes are located near position for AT and CVT models or the . Remember that the brake booster
each of the jack-up reinforcements. shift lever into “1st” for MT models. and power steering do not func-
2. Apply the parking brake. tion when the engine is not
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier running. Because the engine is
– CONTINUED –
turned off, it will take greater Electronic parking brake – if . When releasing the electronic
effort to operate the brake pedal the electronic parking brake parking brake by using the elec-
and steering wheel. tronic parking brake release tool,
cannot be released always perform the following
items.
CAUTION – Shift the shift lever in the “1”
WARNING
. If transmission failure occurs, or “R” position (MT models).
. When the electronic parking – Shift the select lever in the “P”
transport your vehicle on a flat-
brake cannot be released, the position (AT and CVT models).
bed truck.
electronic parking brake system
. Do not run the engine while being may malfunction. Driving in such – Use tire stops under the tires.
towed using this method. Trans- conditions may cause an unex- . When releasing the electronic
mission damage could result if pected accident. Contact your parking brake by using the elec-
the vehicle is towed with the SUBARU dealer for inspection tronic parking brake release tool,
engine running. as soon as possible. make sure that the ignition
. For AT and CVT models, the . You can release the electronic switch is in the “LOCK” position.
traveling speed must be limited parking brake by using the elec- Otherwise, the electronic parking
to less than 20 mph (30 km/h) and tronic parking brake release tool brake system may operate and
the traveling distance to less in case of an emergency. How- the electronic parking brake re-
than 31 miles (50 km). For greater ever, after releasing the electro- lease tool may rotate and unex-
speeds and distances, transport nic parking brake by using the pected accident may occur.
your vehicle on a flat-bed truck. electronic parking brake release
tool, contact your SUBARU deal-
1. Release the parking brake and put the er for inspection as soon as CAUTION
transmission in neutral. possible. . Under certain weather conditions
2. The ignition switch should be in the . Release the electronic parking (rain, snow, sandstorm, etc.), do
“Acc” position while the vehicle is being brake by using the electronic not release the electronic parking
towed. parking brake release tool on a brake by using the electronic
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to level road. Otherwise, the vehicle parking brake release tool. If
prevent damage to the vehicle. may move, which could cause an water or dust enters the device,
accident. the device may malfunction.
. If the cap cannot be removed, 3. Make sure that the brake system
contact your SUBARU dealer for warning light and the indicator light on
inspection. the parking brake switch have turned off.
. After releasing the electronic 4. Use tire stops under the tires to
parking brake by using the elec- prevent the vehicle from moving.
tronic parking brake release tool, 5. Take out the electronic parking brake
make sure that the cap is rein- release tool. Refer to “Maintenance tools”
stalled to the parking brake re- F9-3.
lease device. If the cap is not
reinstalled, water or dust enters
the device and the device may
malfunction.
NOTE
It may be difficult to release the elec-
tronic parking brake by using the
electronic parking brake release tool.
Have your SUBARU dealer release the
electronic parking brake if necessary.
9
In the event that you cannot release the
electronic parking brake by pulling the
electronic parking brake switch or by
depressing the accelerator pedal, you
can release the electronic parking brake
manually by using the electronic parking 6. Insert the electronic parking brake
brake release tool. release tool into the cap of the parking
1. Shift the shift lever in the “1” or “R” brake release device.
position (MT models) or the select lever in 7. Remove the cap of the parking brake
the “P” position (AT and CVT models). release device by turning the electronic
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” parking brake release tool counterclock-
position.
– CONTINUED –
Rear gate (Outback) – if the Always use a flat-head screwdriver Moonroof – if moonroof can-
rear gate cannot be unlocked or a similar tool. not be closed
In the event that you cannot unlock the If the moonroof cannot be closed with the
rear gate by operating the power door moonroof switch, you can close the moon-
locking switches or the remote keyless roof manually.
entry system, you can unlock it from inside 1. Take out the screwdriver from the tool
the cargo area. bucket.
2. Open the overhead console. Refer to
“Overhead console” F6-8.
Appearance care
10
Exterior care become tangled around it, dama- to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
ging the wiper arm and other with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
& Washing components. Ask the automatic remaining water off with a chamois or soft
car-wash operator not to let the cloth.
CAUTION brushes touch the wiper arm or ! Washing the underbody
to fix the wiper arm on the rear
. When washing the vehicle, the window glass with adhesive tape Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
brakes may get wet. As a result, before operating the machine. deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
the brake stopping distance will rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
be longer. To dry the brakes, derbody components, such as the exhaust
drive the vehicle at a safe speed NOTE system, fuel and brake lines, brake
while lightly pressing the brake When having your vehicle washed in cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-
pedal to heat up the brakes. an automatic car wash, make sure pension.
beforehand that the car wash is of Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-
. Do not wash the engine compart-
suitable type. side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
ment and areas adjacent to it. If
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s water at frequent intervals to reduce the
water enters the engine air in-
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the harmful effects of such agents.
take, electrical parts or the power
steering fluid reservoir, it will vehicle at least once a month to avoid Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
cause engine trouble or a mal- contamination by road grime. components may accelerate their corro-
function of the power steering. sion.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
. Do not use any organic solvents of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash After driving off-road or on muddy or
when washing the surface of the the vehicle with hot water and in direct sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off
bulb assembly cover. However, if sunlight. the underbody.
a detergent with organic solvents Carefully flush the suspension and axle
is used to wash the cover sur- Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree parts, as they are particularly prone to
face, completely rinse off the sap, and bird droppings should be washed mud and sand buildup. Do not use a
detergent with water. Otherwise, off by using a light detergent, as required. sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.
the cover surface may be da- If you use a light detergent, make certain
maged. that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use CAUTION
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
. Outback: Since your vehicle is
cleaning agents should be promptly . Be careful not to damage brake
equipped with a rear wiper, auto-
flushed from the surface and not allowed hoses, sensor harnesses, and
matic car-wash brushes could
other parts when washing sus- deterioration of the surface. It is recom- pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
pension components. mended that a coat of wax be applied at Otherwise, the cover surface may be
. Be careful not to flush the engine least once a month, or whenever the damaged.
bottom for a long time. It may surface no longer repels water.
cause damage of some electrical If the appearance of the paint has dimin- NOTE
parts. ished to the point where the luster or tone Be careful not to block the windshield
cannot be restored, lightly polish the washer nozzles with wax when waxing
! Using a warm water washer surface with a fine-grained compound. the vehicle.
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm) Never polish just the affected area, but
or more between the washer nozzle and include the surrounding area as well.
the vehicle. Always polish in only one direction. A & Cleaning aluminum wheels
. Do not wash the same area continu-
No. 2000 grain compound is recom- . Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
mended. Never use a coarse-grained clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
ously. compound. Coarser grained compounds is left on too long, it may be difficult to
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash have a smaller grain-size number and clean off.
by hand. Some warm water washers are could damage the paint. After polishing
of the high temperature, high pressure . Do not use soap containing grit to
with a compound, coat with wax to restore clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
type, and they can damage or deform the the original luster. Frequent polishing with
resin parts such as mouldings, or cause cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
a compound or an incorrect polishing with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
water to leak into the vehicle. technique will result in removing the paint stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
& Waxing and polishing layer and exposing the undercoat. When washing device. 10
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
Always wash and dry the vehicle before . Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-
waxing and polishing. num wheels) with water as soon as
list.
Use a good quality polish and wax and possible when it has been splashed with
apply them according to the manufac- CAUTION sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when driven on roads treated with salt or other
the painted surface is cool. Do not use any agents with organic agents.
solvents on the surface of the bulb
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, assembly cover. However, if a polish
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of or wax with organic solvents is
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of applied to the cover surface, com-
the original luster and also quickens the
Cleaning the interior & Leather seat materials or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
The leather used by SUBARU is a high ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate quality natural product which will retain its soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
control panel, audio equipment, instru- distinctive appearance and feel for many off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
ment panel, center console, combination years with proper care. foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use leather materials may be used when
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the necessary.
organic solvents.) surface can cause the material to become
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular NOTE
& Seat fabric cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber Strong cleaning agents such as sol-
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a cloth should be performed monthly, taking vents, paint thinners, window cleaner
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the care not to soak the leather or allow water or gasoline must never be used on
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum to penetrate the stitched seams. leather or synthetic interior materials.
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly woolen fabrics may be used to remove
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry & Climate control panel, audio
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If panel, instrument panel,
using a solution of mild soap and luke- your SUBARU is to be parked for a long console panel, switches,
warm water then dry thoroughly. time in bright sunlight, it is recommended combination meter, and other
If the stain does not come out, try a
that the seats and headrests be covered, plastic surface
or the windows shaded, to prevent fading Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
commercially available fabric cleaner. Use
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
or shrinkage. control panel, audio equipment, instru- 10
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches ment panel, center console, combination
Use the cleaner according to its instruc- may be treated with a commercial leather meter panel, and switches.
tions. spray lacquer. You will discover that each
leather seat section will develop soft folds NOTE
NOTE or wrinkles, which is characteristic of Do not use organic solvents such as
When cleaning the seat, do not use genuine leather. paint thinners or gasoline, or strong
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar cleaning agents that contain those
materials. & Synthetic leather upholstery solvents.
The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
guard against getting oil or fluids & Before checking or servicing & When checking or servicing
in your eyes. If something does in the engine compartment in the engine compartment
get in your eyes, thoroughly (2.5 L non-turbo models)
wash them out with clean water. WARNING
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seat- . Always stop the engine and apply
belt pretensioner system, or at- the parking brake to prevent the
tempt to take its connectors vehicle from moving.
apart, as that may activate the . Always let the engine cool down.
system or it can render it inop- Engine parts become very hot
erative. NEVER use a circuit when the engine is running and
tester for these wiring. If your remain hot for some time after
SRS airbag or seatbelt preten- the engine is stopped.
sioner needs service, consult . Do not spill engine oil, engine
your nearest SUBARU dealer. coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. Always remove the key from the CAUTION
ignition switch. When the ignition Do not contact the belt cover while
switch is in the “ON” position, checking the components in the
the cooling fan may operate engine compartment. Doing so may
suddenly even when the engine cause your hand to slip off the belt
is stopped. cover and result in an unexpected
. Before performing any servicing injury.
on a vehicle equipped with a
remote engine start system tem-
porarily place that system in the
service mode to prevent it from
unexpectedly starting the engine.
11
Type C clips
Type A clips Insert the clip without the center portion
1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a
first and then push the center portion of
Phillips screwdriver until the center portion
the clip into the hole.
of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
Type B clips
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
11
– CONTINUED –
11
Engine oil conditions, you should check the oil & Checking the oil level
level at least at every second fuel fill-up Check the engine oil level at each fuel
time, and change the oil more fre- stop.
quently. Please refer to the Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet for more de- 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
tails. stop the engine. If you check the oil level
. If the oil consumption rate seems just after stopping the engine, wait a few
abnormally high after the break-in minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
period, for example more than 1 quart pan before checking the level.
per 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000
kilometers, we recommend that you
contact your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
. When the engine low oil level warn-
ing light illuminates, have your vehicle
inspected by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
. The engine oil consumption rate is
not stabilized, and therefore cannot be 2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
determined until the vehicle has tra- and insert it again.
veled at least several thousand miles
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
(kilometers). Even after break-in, when
inserted until it stops with the graphic
the vehicle is used under severe driv-
symbol “ ” on its top appearing as
ing conditions such as those men-
shown in the illustration.
tioned in the Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet, engine oil is consumed
or deteriorated more quickly than un-
der normal driving conditions. If you
drive your vehicle under these severe
NOTE
. To prevent overfilling the engine oil,
do not add any additional oil above the
upper level when the engine is cold.
. In 2.5 L engine models, the level
2.5 L models 3.6 L models gauge has a notch above the upper
1) Notch 1) Full level level. Just after driving or while the
2) Full level 2) Low level engine is warm, the engine oil level
3) Low level 3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 reading may be in a range between the
4) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt) from low level to full level
upper level and the notch mark. This is
Imp qt) from low level to full level
4. Pull out the level gauge again and caused by thermal expansion of the
check the oil level on it. If it is below the engine oil.
low level (L), add oil to bring the level up to
the full level (F).
CAUTION 11
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
– CONTINUED –
3.6 L models
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing
the drain plug while the engine is still
2.5 L non-turbo models warm. The used oil should be drained into
an appropriate container and disposed of
8. Clean the rubber seal seating area of “Lubricants” F12-4. The necessary quan-
the bottom of engine and install the oil tity of oil depends on the quantity of oil that
filter by hand turning. Be careful not to has been drained. The quantity of drained
twist or damage the seal. oil differs slightly depending on the tem-
9. Tighten the oil filter by the amount perature of the oil and the time the oil is
indicated in the following table after the left flowing out. After refilling the engine
seal makes contact with the bottom of with oil, therefore, you must use the level
engine. gauge to confirm that the level is correct.
Model Oil filter Part Amount of 12. Start the engine and make sure that no
color number rotation
oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber
Black 15208AA100 1 rotation seal and drain plug.
2.5 L
models Blue 15208AA12A 7/8 13. Keep the engine idling until the engine
2.5 L turbo models rotation reaches the normal operating temperature
3.6 L 3/4 range, as indicated by the temperature
models Black 15208AA031 rotation gauge on the combination meter. After
that, check the engine oil level again. For
further details about the check procedure,
CAUTION refer to “Checking the oil level” F11-12.
. Never over tighten the oil filter
because that can result in an oil
leak.
. Thoroughly wipe off any engine 11
oil that has spilled over the
exhaust pipe and/or under-cover.
If left unremoved, the oil could
3.6 L models catch fire.
6. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter
10. Reinstall the cover under the oil filter.
wrench.
11. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.
7. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a
thin coat of engine oil to the seal. For the oil capacity (guideline), refer to
– CONTINUED –
& Recommended grade and mended engine oil for optimum engine Cooling system
viscosity performance. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
CAUTION WARNING
Use only engine oil with the recom- Never attempt to remove the radia-
mended grade and viscosity. tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4. completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
NOTE serious burns from a spray of boil-
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects ing hot coolant when the cap is
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity removed.
provide better fuel economy. However,
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
required to properly lubricate the en- CAUTION
gine. . Vehicles are filled at the factory
with SUBARU Super Coolant that
& Synthetic oil does not require the first change
You should use synthetic engine oil that for 11 years/137,500 miles (11
meets the same requirements given for years/220,000 km). This coolant
conventional engine oil. When using should not be mixed with any
synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same other brand or type of coolant
classification, viscosity and grade shown during this period. Mixing with a
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine different coolant will reduce the
oil” F12-4. Also, you must follow the oil life of the coolant. Should it be
and filter changing intervals shown in the necessary to top off the coolant
Warranty and Maintenance booklet. for any reason, use only
SUBARU Super Coolant.
NOTE If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity diluted with another brand or
noted in chapter 12 is the recom- type, the maintenance interval is
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
& Replacing the air cleaner ! Non-turbo models 1. Remove the hydraulic hose in the
element power steering system from the clip on
the right side of the air cleaner case.
Replace the air cleaner element according
to the maintenance schedule in the 2. Unplug the connector that is attached
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un- to the top of the air cleaner case.
der extremely dusty conditions, replace it 3. To remove the connector cable from
more frequently. It is recommended that the air cleaner case, remove the clip that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts. is attached to the connector cable from the
guide lug on the right side of the air
cleaner case.
4. Loosen the screw on the clamp.
5. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case cover.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill manual trans-
11
mission oil when adding it. If oil
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
– CONTINUED –
fluid level on the gauge. If it is below the & Recommended fluid Continuously variable trans-
lower level on the “HOT” range, add the Refer to “Fluids” F12-6.
recommended automatic transmission
mission fluid
fluid up to the upper level. NOTE There is no fluid level gauge. It is
Using any non-specified type of auto- unnecessary to check the continuously
! Checking the fluid level when the matic transmission fluid could result in variable transmission fluid level. However,
fluid is cold damage inside the transmission. When if necessary, consult your SUBARU dealer
When the fluid level has to be checked replacing the automatic transmission for inspection.
without time to warm up the automatic fluid, be sure to use the specified type.
transmission, check to see that the fluid
level is between the lower level and upper
level on the “COLD” range. If it is below
that range, add fluid up to the upper level.
Be careful not to overfill.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill automatic
transmission fluid when adding it.
If automatic transmission fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If automatic transmission fluid
gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to
wipe it off.
11
Rear differential gear oil Power steering fluid power steering fluid touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
There is no oil level gauge. To check the & Checking the fluid level smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
rear differential gear oil level, we recom- power steering fluid gets on the
mend that you consult your SUBARU exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
dealer for inspection. off.
& Recommended grade and The power steering fluid expands greatly
viscosity as its temperature rises; the fluid level
differs according to fluid temperature.
Each oil manufacturer has its own base Therefore, the reservoir tank has two
oils and additives. Never use different different checking ranges for hot and cold
brands together. For details, refer to fluids.
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-5. Check the power steering fluid level
monthly.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface,
and stop the engine.
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself
because the fluid may be hot.
CAUTION 11
. When power steering fluid is
being added, use only clean fluid,
and be careful not to allow any
dirt into the tank. And never use
different brands together.
. Be careful not to spill power
steering fluid when adding it. If 2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir
– CONTINUED –
. When adding brake fluid, be care- Check the fluid level on the outside of the
ful not to allow any dirt into the reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add
reservoir. the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.
Use only brake fluid from a sealed
. Never splash the brake fluid over container.
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
& Recommended brake fluid Clutch fluid (MT models) Alcohol contained in the clutch
Refer to “Fluids” F12-6. fluid may damage them.
& Checking the fluid level . Be careful not to spill clutch fluid
CAUTION when adding it. If clutch fluid
WARNING touches the exhaust pipe, it may
Never use different brands of brake cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing Never let clutch fluid contact your a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if eyes because clutch fluid can be exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
they are the same brand. harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid off.
gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
advisable.
CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If 1) “MAX” level mark 11
you suspect a problem, have the 2) “MIN” level mark
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer. Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level
. When clutch fluid is added, be mark, add the recommended clutch fluid
careful not to allow any dirt into to “MAX” level mark.
the tank.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed
. Never splash the clutch fluid over container.
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
– CONTINUED –
& Recommended clutch fluid Brake booster is applied by lighter force and gener-
Refer to “Fluids” F12-6. ates a greater braking force.
If the brake booster does not operate as . You might hear the sound of ABS
CAUTION described in the following procedure, have operating from the engine compart-
it checked by your SUBARU dealer. ment.
Never use different brands of clutch 1. With the engine off, depress the brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing Brake assist is not a system that brings
pedal several times, applying the same more braking ability to the vehicle
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if pedal force each time. The distance the
they are the same brand. beyond its breaking capability.
pedal travels should not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
the engine. The pedal should move
slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for
approximately 1 minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression.
NOTE
When you depress the brake pedal
strongly or suddenly, the following
phenomena occur. However, even
though these occur, they do not indi-
cate any malfunctions, and the brake
assist system is operating properly.
. You might feel that the brake pedal
Brake pedal & Checking the brake pedal Clutch pedal (MT models)
reserve distance
Check the brake pedal free play and Check the clutch pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the main- reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”. Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the brake pedal & Checking the clutch function
free play Check the clutch engagement and disen-
gagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm) slowly to check that the engine and
Depress the pedal with a force of approxi- transmission smoothly couple without
mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure any sign of slippage.
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
the specification, or when the pedal does
1) 0.08 – 0.18 in (2 – 5 mm)
not operate smoothly, contact with your 11
Stop the engine and firmly depress the SUBARU dealer.
brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the
brake pedal up with one finger to check
the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf
(10 N, 1 kgf).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
– CONTINUED –
& Checking the clutch pedal Replacement of brake pad you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
free play pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
and lining soon as possible.
Tires and wheels or icy roads, we strongly recommend the tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an
use of winter (snow) tires. extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for
& Types of tires When installing winter tires, be sure to every difference of 108F (5.68C) between
replace all four tires. the temperature in the garage and the
You should be familiar with type of tires
temperature outside. By way of example,
present on your vehicle. ! Winter (snow) tires
the following table shows the required tire
! All season tires Winter tires are best suited for driving on pressures that correspond to various out-
snow-covered and icy roads. However side temperatures when the temperature
The factory-installed tires on your new
winter tires do not perform as well as in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
vehicle except 2.5 L turbo models are all
summer tires and all season tires on roads Example:
season tires.
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
All season tires are designed to provide Tire size: P215/70R16 99S, P225/60R17
an adequate measure of traction, handling 98T
& Tire pressure monitoring
and braking performance in year-round Standard tire pressures:
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
driving including snowy and icy road Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
conditions. However all season tires do The tire pressure monitoring system pro- Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2)
not offer as much traction performance as vides the driver with a warning message
by sending a signal from a sensor that is Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
or on icy roads. installed in each wheel when tire pressure Adjusted pressure
All season tires are identified by “ALL is severely low. The tire pressure monitor- Outside [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
ing system will activate only when the temperature
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on Front Rear
the tire sidewall. vehicle is driven. Also, this system may
not react immediately to a sudden drop in 308F (−18C) 35 (240, 2.4) 33 (230, 2.3)
! Summer tires tire pressure (for example, a blow-out 37 35
The factory-installed tires on your new 2.5 caused by running over a sharp object). 108F (−128C) (255, 2.55) (240, 2.4) 11
L turbo models are summer tires. Summer −108F
tires are high-speed capability tires best If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm 39 (270, 2.7) 37 (255, 2.55)
(−238C)
suited for highway driving under dry garage and will then drive the vehicle in
conditions. cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire Example:
pressures may cause the low tire pressure Tire size: P205/60R16 91V, P215/50R17
Summer tires are inadequate for driving
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this 90V, P225/50R17 93V, 225/45R18 91W
on slippery roads such as on snow-
problem when adjusting the tire pressures
covered or icy roads. Standard tire pressures:
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered pressures higher than those shown on the Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
– CONTINUED –
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) or by an increase in the temperature in the WARNING
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C) tires can cause the low tire pressure
warning light to go off. If the low tire pressure warning light
Adjusted pressure does not illuminate briefly after the
Outside [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)] System resetting is necessary when the
temperature wheels are changed (for example, a ignition switch is turned ON or the
Front Rear light illuminates steadily after blink-
switch to snow tires) and new TPMS
308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4) valves are installed on the newly fitted ing for approximately one minute,
wheels. Have this work performed by a you should have your Tire Pressure
38 37
108F (−128C) (265, 2.65) (255, 2.55) SUBARU dealer following wheel replace- Monitoring System checked at a
ment. SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
−108F 40 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7) ble.
(−238C)
It may not be possible to install TPMS If this light illuminates while driving,
If the low tire pressure warning light valves on certain wheels that are on the never brake suddenly and keep
illuminates when you drive the vehicle in market. Therefore, if you change the driving straight ahead while gradu-
cold outside air after adjusting the tire wheels (for example, a switch to snow ally reducing speed. Then slowly
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the tires), use wheels that have the same part pull off the road to a safe place.
tire pressures using the method described number as the standard-equipment Otherwise an accident involving
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed wheels. Without four operational TPMS serious vehicle damage and serious
to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS personal injury could occur.
see that the low tire pressure warning light will not fully function and the warning light
in the instrument panel will illuminate If this light still illuminates while
goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire driving after adjusting the tire pres-
pressure warning light does not go off, the steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute. sure, a tire may have significant
tire pressure monitoring system may not damage and a fast leak that causes
be functioning normally. In this event, go When a tire is replaced, adjustments are the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
to a SUBARU dealer to have the system necessary to ensure continued normal a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
inspected as soon as possible. operation of the tire pressure monitoring as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction be- system. As with wheel replacement, there- When a spare tire is mounted or a
tween tires and the road surface causes fore, you should have the work performed wheel rim is replaced without the
the tires to warm up. After illumination of by a SUBARU dealer. original pressure sensor/transmitter
the low tire pressure warning light, any being transferred, the low tire pres-
increase in the tire pressures caused by sure warning light will illuminate
an increase in the outside air temperature steadily after blinking for approxi-
NOTE . Correct tire pressure (tread worn . Abnormally low tire pressure (tread
. The air pressure in a tire increases evenly) worn at shoulders)
by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold when
the vehicle has been parked for at least
3 hours or has been driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will result
in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from con- Roadholding is good, and steering is Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-
trollability and ride comfort, and they responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so sumption is also higher.
cause the tires to wear abnormally. fuel consumption is also lower.
. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread & Wheel balance & Wear indicators
worn in center) Each wheel was correctly balanced when
your vehicle was new, but the wheels will
become unbalanced as the tires become
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from
the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can
also cause steering and suspension sys-
tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If
you suspect that the wheels are not
correctly balanced, have them checked
and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire repairs
and after tire rotation. 1) New tread
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire 2) Worn tread
magnifies the effects of road surface NOTE 3) Tread wear indicator
bumps and dips, possibly resulting in Loss of correct wheel alignment*
vehicle damage. Each tire incorporates a tread wear
causes the tires to wear on one side indicator, which becomes visible when
and reduces the vehicle’s running the depth of the tread grooves decreases
WARNING stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be
if you notice abnormal tire wear. replaced when the tread wear indicator
Driving at high speeds with exces-
*: The suspension system is designed to hold appears as a solid band across the tread.
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to 11
rapidly become hot. A sharp in- the other wheels and to the road) for optimum WARNING
crease in temperature could cause straight-line stability and cornering perfor-
tread separation, and destruction of When a tire’s tread wear indicator
mance.
the tires. The resulting loss of becomes visible, the tire is worn
vehicle control could lead to an beyond the acceptable limit and
accident. must be replaced immediately. With
a tire in this condition, driving at
high speeds in wet weather can
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread reg-
ularly and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visible.
In areas where water freezes in winter, the concentration of the fluid remaining in Replacement of wiper blades
use an anti-freeze type windshield washer the piping is too low for the outside
fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid temperature, it may freeze and block the Grease, wax, insects, or other materials
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% nozzles. on the windshield or the wiper blade
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- results in jerky wiper operation and streak-
perature varies according to how much it CAUTION ing on the glass. If you cannot remove the
is diluted, as indicated in the following streaks after operating the windshield
table. . Adjust the washer fluid concen-
washer or if the wiper operation is jerky,
tration appropriately for the out-
clean the outer surface of the windshield
Washer Fluid Freezing side temperature. If the concen-
Concentration Temperature
(or rear window) and the wiper blades
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
30% 10.48F (−128C) washer fluid may freeze on the
detergent or mild abrasive cleaner. After
windshield and obstruct your
50% −48F (−208C) cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
view, and the fluid may freeze in
blades with clean water. The windshield is
100% −498F (−458C) the reservoir tank.
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
. State or local regulations on the windshield with water.
volatile organic compounds may
CAUTION restrict the use of methanol, a CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids . Do not clean the wiper blades
fluid because it could cause paint
containing non-methanol anti- with gasoline or a solvent, such
damage.
freeze agents should be used as paint thinner or benzine. This
only if they provide cold weather will cause deterioration of the
In order to prevent freezing of washer
wiper blades.
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in protection without damaging 11
the table above when adjusting the fluid your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades . When you wish to raise the
concentration to the outside temperature. or washer system. passenger-side wiper arm, first
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with raise the driver-side wiper arm.
a different concentration from the one Otherwise, the passenger-side
used previously, purge the old fluid from wiper assembly and driver-side
the piping between the reservoir tank and wiper assembly will touch each
washer nozzles by operating the washer other, possibly resulting in
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if scratches.
– CONTINUED –
. Return the passenger-side wiper & Windshield wiper blade as- & Windshield wiper blade rub-
arm to its original position before sembly ber
returning the driver-side wiper
arm to its original position. 1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
Otherwise, the passenger-side
wiper assembly and driver-side
wiper assembly will touch each
other, possibly resulting in
scratches.
. When returning the raised wipers
to the original positions, return
the wipers slowly on the wind-
shield by hand. Returning the
wipers from the detached posi-
tions by the spring operation
might change the shape of the 1) Support
wiper arm or scratch the wind- 1) Open the cover
shield. 1. Grasp the locked end of the blade
2) Pull down the wiper blade
rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even 2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by stoppers on the rubber are free of the
after following this method, replace the opening the cover and pulling it down in support.
wiper blades using the following proce- the direction shown in the illustration.
dures. 3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
grooves in the rubber and slide the blade & Rear window wiper blade
rubber assembly into the support until it assembly (Outback)
locks.
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
1) Metal spines
& Rear window wiper blade 2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
rubber (Outback) the plastic support.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
One is located under the instrument panel
when charging the battery because
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
it will shorten battery life.
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
The other one is housed in the engine The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
compartment. box in the engine compartment.
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. We recommend that you have
the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
! Low beam light bulbs 5. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer
3. Disconnect the electrical connector. spring securely.
1. Pull off the fender lining. For details, 6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
refer to “Pulling off the fender lining” F11- 7. Install the bulb cover.
7.
11
Left-hand side
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the
secured clip of the washer tank. To make
it easy to access the bulb, move the
washer tank to the horizontal direction
(left-hand side).
! Outback
1) Brake/tail and rear side marker light 4. Slide the rear combination light as-
2) Rear turn signal light sembly straight rearward and remove it
3) Back-up light 1. Undo the clips. For the method to undo
the clips, refer to “Type C clips” F11-6. from the vehicle.
2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear 2. Remove the cover.
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise. Use pliers if necessary.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
4. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks. 11
5. Securely lock the cover against the
trunk trim.
– CONTINUED –
1) Tail and rear side marker light 8. Reinstall the rear combination light
2) Brake light assembly by sliding the two-pronged part 1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the
3) Rear turn signal light of the combination light assembly securely light cover as shown in the illustration, and
5. Remove the bulb holder from the rear to each holder of the vehicle side. pry the light cover off from the rear gate
combination light assembly by turning it trim.
counterclockwise.
6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
7. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
11
11
– CONTINUED –
& Door step light 4. Reinstall the lens. 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
& Cargo area light (Outback) 4. Reinstall the lens.
Specifications
12
12-2 Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
Legacy Outback
Item
2.5 L non-turbo 2.5 L turbo 3.6 L 2.5 L non-turbo 3.6 L
Drive system AWD
Transmission type MT CVT MT AT MT CVT AT
Overall length 186.4 (4,735) 188.2 (4,780)
Overall width 71.7 (1,820) 71.7 (1,820)
Overall height
59.3 (1,505) 66.1 (1,680)*2
65.7 (1,670)*3
Wheelbase 108.3 (2,750) 107.9 (2,740)
Tread Front 61.6 (1,565) 61.0 (1,550) 61.6 (1,565) 61.0 (1,550)
Rear 61.8 (1,570) 61.2 (1,555) 61.8 (1,570) 61.0 (1,550)
Ground clearance*1 5.9 (150) 8.7 (220)
Specifications 12-3
& Engine
Engine model EJ253 EJ255 EZ36D
(2.5 L, SOHC, non-turbo) (2.5 L, DOHC, turbo) (3.6 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 6 cylinder,
4 stroke gasoline engine 4 stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 149.94 (2,457) 221.52 (3,630)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.92 6 3.11 (99.5 6 79.0) 3.62 6 3.58 (92.0 6 91.0)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.4 : 1 10.5 : 1
Firing order 1–3–2–4 1–6–3–2–5–4
& Fuel
Vehicle model Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity
Non-turbo models Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI or higher
18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)
Turbo models Premium unleaded gasoline with 93 AKI or higher*1
12
– CONTINUED –
12-4 Specifications
& Lubricants
! Engine oil
Oil grade*1 or
API classification SM or SN with the words ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can be identified
“ENERGY CONSERVING” or “RESOURCE with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst
CONSERVING” mark)
5W-30 synthetic oil is recommended for
optimum engine performance and protection.
Conventional oil may be used if synthetic oil is
SAE viscosity No. and applicable unavailable.
temperature
5W-30 or 5W-40 conventional oil may be used
if replenishment is needed, but it should be
changed to 5W-30 synthetic oil at the next oil
change.
2.5 L non-turbo models 4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)
Oil capacity*2 2.5 L turbo models 4.5 US qt (4.3 liters, 3.8 Imp qt)
3.6 L models 6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
*1: The recommended oil grades can be identified by looking for either or both of its original marks indicated on the oil container.
*2: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter. After refilling the
engine with oil, the oil level should be checked using an oil level gauge. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-12.
Specifications 12-5
– Remarks*2
Manual transmission oil 3.9 US qt (3.7 liters, 3.3 Imp qt) “Manual transmission oil” F11-23
Oil capacity*1 Front differential gear oil “Front differential gear oil (AT and
(AT and CVT models) 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt) CVT models)” F11-26
Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt) “Rear differential gear oil” F11-27
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
12
– CONTINUED –
12-6 Specifications
& Fluids
Fluid Fluid type*1 Fluid capacity*2 Remarks*3
Automatic transmission fluid (5AT · SUBARU ATF 10.4 US qt (9.8 liters, 8.6 Imp qt) “Automatic transmission fluid”
models) · IDEMITSU ATF HP F11-24
Continuously variable transmission Consult your SUBARU dealer.
fluid (CVT models) 13.2 US qt (12.5 liters, 11.0 Imp qt) “Continuously variable trans-
mission fluid” F11-25
Power steering fluid · SUBARU ATF
· IDEMITSU ATF HP 0.7 US qt (0.7 liters, 0.6 Imp qt) · “Power steering” F7-23
· “Dexron III” Type Automatic · “Power steering fluid” F11-27
Transmission Fluid
Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 “Brake fluid” F11-28
brake fluid –
Clutch fluid (MT models) FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 “Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-
brake fluid – 29
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-16.
Specifications 12-7
& Tires
Tire size P205/60R16 P215/70R16 P225/60R17 P215/50R17 P225/50R17 225/45R18
91V 99S 98T 90V 93V 91W
Wheel size 16 6 6 1/2JJ 16 6 6 1/2JJ 17 6 7J 17 6 7 1/2J 18 6 7 1/2J
16 6 6 1/2J
Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa) 32 psi (220 kPa) 33 psi (230 kPa)
Rear 32 psi (220 kPa) 30 psi (210 kPa) 32 psi (220 kPa)
Temporary spare Size T135/80R16 T145/80R17 T135/80R16 T135/70R17
tire
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa)
Wheel nut tightening torque 89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*1*2
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel 12
nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible.
*2: For the wheel nut tightening procedure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-6.
– CONTINUED –
12-8 Specifications
*: The difference between right-hand camber and left-hand camber should be within 45’ or less.
Specifications 12-9
12
– CONTINUED –
12-10 Specifications
Specifications 12-11
12
A) Main fuse
– CONTINUED –
12-12 Specifications
Specifications 12-13
Bulb chart
12
NOTE
Lights A and B are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
– CONTINUED –
12-14 Specifications
Specifications 12-15
12
12-16 Specifications
13
Example: WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle. (1) Manufacturer’s Identification
(6) Load Index: A numerical code Putting a speed rated tire on Mark
which specifies the maximum load any vehicle does not mean (2) Tire Size
a tire can carry at the speed the vehicle can be operated (3) Tire Type Code
indicated by its speed symbol, at at the tire’s rated speed.
(4) Date of Manufacture
maximum inflation pressure. . The speed rating is void if
The first two figures identify the
For example, “91” means 1,356 lbs the tires are worn out, da-
week, starting with “01” to represent
(615 kg), “90” means 1,323 lbs (600 maged, repaired, retreaded,
the first full week of the calendar
kg), “89” means 1,279 lbs (580 kg) or otherwise altered from
their original condition. If year; the second two figures repre-
WARNING tires are repaired, re- sent the year. For example, 0101
treaded, or otherwise al- means the 1st week of 2001.
Load indices apply only to the
tered, they may not be sui- ! Other markings
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting
a load rated tire on any vehicle table for original equipment The following makings are also
does not mean the vehicle can tire designed loads and placed on the sidewall.
speeds.
be loaded up to the tire’s rated ! Maximum permissible inflation
load. pressure
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The maximum cold inflation pres-
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical Tire Identification Number (TIN) is sure to which this tire may be
system describing a tire’s capability marked on the intended outboard inflated. For example, “350 kPa
to travel at established and prede- sidewall. The TIN is composed of (51 PSI) MAX. PRESS” 13
termined speeds. four groups. Here is a brief review
For example, “V” means 149 mph of the TIN with a breakdown of its
(240 km/h) individual elements.
– CONTINUED –
! Construction type
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
The vehicle placard shows original specific values. Driving even a by ply cords and that is shaped to fit
tire size, recommended cold tire short distance warms up the tires the rim.
inflation pressure on each tire at and increases the tire pressures. . Bead separation
maximum loaded vehicle weight, Also, the tire pressures are affected A breakdown of the bond between
seating capacity and loading infor- by the outside temperature. It is components in the bead.
mation. best to check tire pressure out- . Bias ply tire
! Adverse safety consequences doors before driving the vehicle. A pneumatic tire in which the ply
of under-inflation When a tire becomes warm, the air cords that extend to the beads are
Driving at high speeds with exces- inside it expands, causing the tire laid at alternate angles substantially
sively low tire pressures can cause pressure to increase. Be careful not less than 90 degrees to the center-
the tires to flex severely and to to mistakenly release air from a line of the tread.
rapidly become hot. A sharp in- warm tire to reduce its pressure. . Carcass
crease in temperature could cause The tire structure, except tread and
& Glossary of tire terminology sidewall rubber which, when in-
tread separation, and failure of the
. Accessory weight flated, bears the load.
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an The combined weight (in excess of . Chunking
accident. those standard items which may be The breaking away of pieces of the
replaced) of automatic transmis- tread or sidewall.
! Measuring and adjusting air sion, power steering, power brakes,
pressure to achieve proper in- . Cold tire pressure
power windows, power seats, radio, The pressure in a tire that has been
flation
and heater, to the extent that these driven less than 1 mile or has been
Check and, if necessary, adjust the items are available as factory-in-
pressure of each tire (including the standing for three hours or more.
stalled equipment (whether in- . Cord
spare) at least once a month and stalled or not).
before any long journey. Check the The strands forming the plies in the 13
. Bead
tire pressures when the tires are tire.
The part of the tire that is made of . Cord separation
cold. Use a pressure gauge to steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
adjust the tire pressures to the The parting of cords from adjacent
– CONTINUED –
sidewall, or innerliner that extends mounted on an automotive wheel, sures than the corresponding stan-
to cord material. provides the traction and contains dard tire.
. Outer diameter the gas or fluid that sustains the . Rim
The overall diameter of an inflated load. A metal support for a tire or a tire
new tire. . Production options weight and tube assembly upon which the
. Overall width The combined weight of those tire beads are seated.
The linear distance between the installed regular production options . Rim diameter
exteriors of the sidewalls of an weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in Nominal diameter of the bead seat.
inflated tire, including elevations excess of those standard items . Rim size designation
due to labeling, decorations, or which they replace, not previously Rim diameter and width.
protective bands or ribs. considered in curb weight or acces- . Rim type designation
. Passenger car tire sory weight, including heavy duty The industry of manufacturer’s des-
A tire intended for use on passen- brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, ignation for a rim by style or code.
ger cars, multipurpose passenger heavy duty battery, and special . Rim width
vehicles, and trucks, that have a trim. Nominal distance between rim
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) . Radial ply tire flanges.
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less. A pneumatic tire in which the ply . Section width
. Ply cords that extend to the beads are The linear distance between the
A layer of rubber-coated parallel laid at substantially 90 degrees to exteriors of the sidewalls of an
cords. the centerline of the tread. inflated tire, excluding elevations
. Ply separation . Recommended inflation pres- due to labeling, decoration, or
A parting of rubber compound sure protective bands.
between adjacent plies. The cold inflation pressure recom- . Sidewall
. Pneumatic tire mended by a vehicle manufacturer. That portion of a tire between the 13
A mechanical device made of rub- . Reinforced tire tread and bead.
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or A tire designed to operate at higher . Sidewall separation
other materials, that, when loads and at higher inflation pres- The parting of the rubber com-
– CONTINUED –
pound from the cord material in the . Vehicle maximum load on the
sidewall. tire
. Test rim Load on an individual tire that is
The rim on which a tire is fitted for determined by distributing to each
testing, and it may be any rim listed axle its share of the maximum
as appropriate for use with that tire. loaded vehicle weight and dividing
. Tread by two.
That portion of a tire that comes . Vehicle normal load on the tire
into contact with the road. Load on an individual tire that is
. Tread rib determined by distributing to each
A tread section running circumfer- axle its share of the curb weight,
entially around a tire. accessory weight, and normal oc-
. Tread separation cupant weight (distributed in accor-
Pulling away of the tread from the dance with Table 1 that is ap-
tire carcass. pended to the end of this section)
. Treadwear indicators (TWI) and dividing by 2.
. Wheel-holding fixture
The projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual The fixture used to hold the wheel
indication of the degrees of wear of and tire assembly securely during
the tread. testing.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capa-
city.
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for & Tire care – maintenance and
various designated seating capacities safety practices
. Check on a daily basis that the
Designated seating Vehicle normal load, Occupant distribution in a tires are free from serious damage,
capacity, number of number of occupants normally loaded vehicle nails, and stones. At the same time,
occupants
check the tires for abnormal wear.
2 through 4 2 2 in front. . Inspect the tire tread regularly
2 in front, 1 in second and replace the tires before their
5 through 10 3 seat. tread wear indicators become visi-
2 in front, 1 in second ble. When a tire’s tread wear
11 through 15 5 seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in indicator becomes visible, the tire
fourth seat. is worn beyond the acceptable limit
2 in front, 2 in second and must be replaced immediately.
16 through 22 7 seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in With a tire in this condition, driving
fourth seat. at even low speeds in wet weather
can cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead to an
accident.
13
– CONTINUED –
. To maximize the life of each tire driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the ! Calculating total and load ca-
and ensure that the tires wear statement “The combined weight pacities varying seating con-
uniformly, it is best to rotate the of occupants and cargo should figurations
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” Calculate the available load capa-
Rotating the tires involves switch- on your vehicle’s placard. city as shown in the following
ing the front and rear tires on the The vehicle placard also shows examples:
right-hand side of the vehicle and seating capacity of your vehicle. Example 1A
similarly switching the front and The total load capacity includes the
rear tires on the left-hand side of total weight of driver and all pas-
the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept sengers and their belongings, any
on its original side of the vehicle.) cargo, any optional equipment such
Replace any damaged or unevenly as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
worn tire at the time of rotation. carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
After tire rotation, adjust the tire a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
pressures and make sure the wheel can be calculated by the following
nuts are correctly tightened. For method.
information about the tightening
torque and tightening sequence Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
for the wheel nuts, refer to “Flat weight of occupants + total weight
Vehicle capacity weight of the
tires” F9-6. of optional equipment + tongue
vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which
load of a trailer (if applicable))
& Vehicle load limit – how to is indicated on the vehicle placard
determine For towing capacity information and with the statement “The combined
weight limits, refer to “Trailer tow- weight of occupants and cargo
The load capacity of your vehicle is
ing” F8-19. should never exceed 363 kg or
determined by weight, not by avail-
800 lbs”.
able cargo space. The load limit of
your vehicle is shown on the For example, if the vehicle has one
vehicle placard attached to the
occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) Example 1B 2. Calculate the available load ca-
plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250 pacity.
kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
– CONTINUED –
is indicated on the vehicle placard 2. Calculate the available load ca- vehicle (bringing the number of
with the statement “The combined pacity. occupants to three), and a child
weight of occupants and cargo restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
should never exceed 363 kg or kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
800 lbs”. child to use, the calculations are as
follows:
For example, the vehicle has one
1. Calculate the total weight.
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted 3. The result of step 2 shows that a
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can
(10 kg), to which is attached a be carried.
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). Example 2B
10% of the trailer weight is applied
to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
available amount of cargo and Uniform tire quality grading form to Federal Safety Require-
luggage load capacity. For exam- standards ments in addition to these grades.
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be This information indicates the rela- & Treadwear
five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in tive performance of passenger car The treadwear grade is a compara-
your vehicle, the amount of avail- tires in the area of treadwear, tive rating based on the wear rate of
able cargo and luggage load capa- traction, and temperature resis- the tire when tested under con-
city is 650 lbs (1,400 − 750 (5 6 tance. This is to aid the consumer trolled conditions on a specified
150) = 650 lbs). in making an informed choice in the government test course.
5. Determine the combined weight purchase of tires. For example, a tire graded 150
of luggage and cargo being loaded Quality grades can be found where would wear one and one-half (1-
on the vehicle. That weight may not applicable on the tire sidewall be- 1/2) times as well on the govern-
safely exceed the available cargo tween tread shoulder and maxi- ment course as a tire graded 100.
and luggage load capacity calcu- mum section width. For example: The relative performance of tires
lated in Step 4. Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem- depends upon the actual conditions
6. If your vehicle will be towing a perature A of their use, however, and may
trailer, load from your trailer will be depart significantly from the norm
transferred to your vehicle. Consult The quality grades apply to new due to variations in driving habits,
this manual to determine how this pneumatic tires for use on passen- service practices and differences in
reduces the available cargo and ger cars. However, they do not road characteristics and climate.
luggage load capacity of your ve- apply to deep tread, winter type
hicle. snow tires, space-saver or tempor- & Traction AA, A, B, C
ary use spare tires, tires with The traction grades, from highest to
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
or less, or to some limited produc- grades represent the tire’s ability to
tion tires. stop on wet pavement as measured
All passenger car tires must con- under controlled conditions on spe-
cified government test surfaces of grade C corresponds to a level of Reporting safety defects
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked performance which all passenger (USA)
C may have poor traction perfor- car tires must meet under the
mance. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- If you believe that your vehicle has
dards No. 109. Grades B and A a defect which could cause a
WARNING represent higher levels of perfor- crash or could cause injury or
The traction grade assigned to mance on the laboratory test wheel death, you should immediately in-
this tire is based on straight- than the minimum required by law. form the National Highway Traffic
ahead braking traction tests, Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
WARNING addition to notifying Subaru of
and does not include accel-
eration, cornering, hydroplan- The temperature grade for this America, Inc.
ing, or peak traction charac- tire is established for a tire If NHTSA receives similar com-
teristics. that is properly inflated and plaints, it may open an investiga-
not overloaded. Excessive tion, and if it finds that a safety
speed, underinflation, or ex- defect exists in a group of vehi-
& Temperature A, B, C cessive loading, either sepa- cles, it may order a recall and
The temperature grades are A (the rately or in combination, can remedy campaign. However,
highest), B, and C, representing the cause heat buildup and possi- NHTSA cannot become involved
tire’s resistance to the generation of ble tire failure. in individual problems between
heat and its ability to dissipate heat you, your dealer, or Subaru of
when tested under controlled con- America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,
ditions on a specified indoor labora- you may call the Vehicle Safety
tory test wheel. Sustained high Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
temperature can cause the material (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to 13
of the tire to degenerate and reduce http://www.safercar.gov; or write
tire life, and excessive temperature
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
– CONTINUED –
Index
14
14-2 Index
Index 14-3
Brake pedal Clutch function ..................................................... 11-31
Free play ............................................................. 11-31 Clutch pedal free play ........................................... 11-32
Reserve distance .................................................. 11-31 Coolant level........................................................ 11-17
Brake system ............................................................ 7-24 Fluid level (automatic transmission fluid).................. 11-24
Warning light ......................................................... 3-17 Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-28
Braking ..................................................................... 7-24 Fluid level (clutch fluid).......................................... 11-29
Tips...................................................................... 7-24 Fluid level (power steering fluid) ............................. 11-27
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ................... 11-32 Fluid level (washer fluid)........................................ 11-40
Bulb Oil level (engine oil) .............................................. 11-12
Chart .................................................................. 12-13 Oil level (front differential gear oil) .......................... 11-26
Replacing............................................................. 11-48 Oil level (manual transmission oil) .......................... 11-23
Child restraint systems ................................................ 1-25
C Installation of a booster seat .................................... 1-32
Cargo area Installation with A/ELR seatbelt ................................ 1-28
Cover ................................................................... 6-15 Lower and tether anchorages................................... 1-33
Light....................................................................... 6-3 Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-36
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-17 Child safety ................................................................... 5
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3 Locks.................................................................... 2-20
Center Chime
Console .................................................................. 6-6 Key........................................................................ 3-4
Ventilators ............................................................... 4-3 Light ..................................................................... 3-27
Changing Seatbelt......................................................... 1-14, 3-10
Coolant................................................................ 11-17 Cleaning
Flat tire ................................................................... 9-6 Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3
Oil and oil filter ..................................................... 11-14 Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-14 Ventilation grille ...................................................... 4-14
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator Climate control system
lamp...................................................................... 3-12 Automatic ............................................................... 4-8
Checking Manual................................................................... 4-4
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-31 Clock ........................................................................ 3-24
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-31 Clutch
14-4 Index
Index 14-5
Warning ........................................................ 3-19, 7-37 Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-22
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-14 Turn signal light.................................................... 11-51
Engine Front fog light........................................................... 11-51
Compartment overview ........................................... 11-9 Front seats ................................................................. 1-2
Coolant........................................................ 11-17, 12-6 Forward and backward adjustment ............................ 1-3
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................. 6, 8-2 Head restraint adjustment......................................... 1-6
Hood .................................................................... 11-7 Power seat ............................................................. 1-4
Low oil level warning light ....................................... 3-14 Reclining ................................................................ 1-3
Oil............................................................... 11-12, 12-4 Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) ........................ 1-4
Overheating .......................................................... 9-12 Fuel ........................................................................... 7-2
Starting................................................................... 7-8 Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2
Stopping ............................................................... 7-10 Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-3
Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2 Gauge.................................................................... 3-7
Requirements ................................................. 7-2, 12-3
F Fuses ..................................................................... 11-46
Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-6 Main fuse ............................................................ 11-48
Floor mat .................................................................. 6-14 Fuses and circuits ...................................................... 12-9
Fluid level
Automatic transmission .......................................... 11-24 G
Brake .................................................................. 11-28 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................... 8-13
Clutch.................................................................. 11-29 Glove box................................................................... 6-6
Power steering ..................................................... 11-27 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................... 8-13
Fog light
Bulb .................................................................... 11-51 H
Indicator light......................................................... 3-24 Hands-free system...................................................... 5-32
Switch .................................................................. 3-30 Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-5, 9-2
Front Head restraint adjustment
Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-26, 12-5 Front seat............................................................... 1-6
Fog light ...................................................... 3-30, 11-51 Rear seat .............................................................. 1-10
Fog light indicator light............................................ 3-24 Headlight......................................................... 3-28, 11-48
Position light......................................................... 11-51 Bulb wattage........................................................ 12-13
14-6 Index
Index 14-7
Cargo area.................................................... 6-3, 11-58 Tools...................................................................... 9-3
Control switch........................................................ 3-27 Malfunction indicator lamp (check engine warning light)... 3-12
Dome ........................................................... 6-2, 11-56 Manual
Door step............................................................. 11-58 Climate control system ............................................. 4-4
Front fog...................................................... 3-30, 11-51 Mode .................................................................... 7-22
Front position ....................................................... 11-51 Seat....................................................................... 1-3
Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-4 Transmission ......................................................... 7-16
License plate ........................................................ 11-55 Transmission oil ........................................... 11-23, 12-5
Map ............................................................. 6-2, 11-57 Map light ........................................................... 6-2, 11-57
Rear combination.................................................. 11-52 Maximum load limits ................................................... 8-19
Rear turn signal (Sedan) ........................................ 11-52 Meters and gauges...................................................... 3-5
Rear turn signal (Station wagon) ............................. 11-53 Mirror defogger .......................................................... 3-34
Tail and rear side marker (Outback)......................... 11-53 Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-36
Tail light (Station wagon) ........................................ 11-53 Moonroof........................................................... 2-28, 9-19
Tail/Back-up (Outback)........................................... 11-54 Multi function display................................................... 3-25
Trunk................................................................... 11-58
Turn signal ......................................... 3-29, 11-51, 11-52 N
Vanity mirror .................................................. 6-5, 11-57 New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2
Loading your vehicle .................................................. 8-12
Low fuel warning light ........................................... 3-8, 3-19 O
Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-15 Odometer ................................................................... 3-6
Lower and tether anchorage........................................ 1-33 Off road driving ........................................................... 8-6
Lubricants ................................................................. 12-4 Oil filter ................................................................... 11-14
Oil level
M Engine ................................................................ 11-12
Main fuse................................................................. 11-48 Front differential gear ............................................ 11-26
Maintenance Manual transmission ............................................. 11-23
Precautions ........................................................... 11-3 Rear differential gear ............................................ 11-27
Schedule .............................................................. 11-3 Warning light.......................................................... 3-14
Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-22 Oil pressure warning light ............................................ 3-14
Tips...................................................................... 11-5
14-8 Index
Index 14-9
Brake light (Outback)............................................. 11-53 Front...................................................................... 1-2
Brake light (Station wagon) .................................... 11-53 Heater.................................................................... 1-6
Brake/Tail and rear side marker light (Legacy) .......... 11-52 Height adjustment.................................................... 1-4
Brake/Tail light (Sedan).......................................... 11-52 Power .................................................................... 1-4
Cargo area light .................................................... 11-58 Rear ...................................................................... 1-7
Dome light ........................................................... 11-56 Seatbelt................................................................. 4, 1-12
Door step light ...................................................... 11-58 Fastening .............................................................. 1-15
Front fog light ....................................................... 11-51 Maintenance .......................................................... 1-22
Front position light................................................. 11-51 Pretensioners......................................................... 1-22
Front turn signal light............................................. 11-51 Safety tips ............................................................. 1-12
Headlight ............................................................. 11-48 Warning light and chime .................................. 1-14, 3-10
License plate light ................................................. 11-55 Security
Map light.............................................................. 11-57 Alarm system ......................................................... 2-15
Rear combination light ........................................... 11-52 ID plate .................................................................. 2-3
Rear turn signal light (Sedan) ................................. 11-52 Immobilizer ............................................................. 2-3
Rear turn signal light (Station wagon) ...................... 11-53 Indicator light .................................................. 2-4, 3-22
Tail and rear side marker light (Outback).................. 11-53 Shock sensors ....................................................... 2-19
Tail light (Station wagon) ........................................ 11-53 Security indicator light ................................................. 3-22
Tail/Back-up light (Outback) .................................... 11-54 Select lever ............................................................... 7-19
Trunk light............................................................ 11-58 Position indicator .................................................... 3-22
Vanity mirror light .................................................. 11-57 Shift lock function ................................................... 7-20
Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-11 Shock sensors ........................................................... 2-19
Roof rails with integrated cross bars............................. 8-14 Shopping bag hook..................................................... 6-13
Snow tires ....................................................... 8-10, 11-33
S Snowy and icy roads ................................................... 8-9
Safety Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-10
Precautions when driving ............................................. 4 Spark plugs ..................................................... 11-22, 12-7
Symbol ...................................................................... 2 Specifications............................................................. 12-2
Warnings ................................................................... 2 Speedometer .............................................................. 3-6
Seat SRS
Fabric................................................................... 10-5 Curtain airbag ........................................................ 1-54
14-10 Index
Index 14-11
V Low fuel ......................................................... 3-8, 3-19
Valet mode................................................................ 2-18 Low tire pressure.................................................... 3-15
Vanity mirror ...................................................... 6-5, 11-57 Oil pressure ........................................................... 3-14
Light.................................................................... 11-57 Seatbelt......................................................... 1-14, 3-10
Vehicle SRS airbag system................................................. 3-11
Capacity weight ..................................................... 8-13 Vehicle Dynamics Control ................................ 3-20, 7-30
Identification ........................................................ 12-16 Windshield washer fluid........................................... 3-20
Symbols .................................................................... 3 Warranties ..................................................................... 1
Vehicle Dynamics Control Warranties and maintenance........................................ 8-19
OFF indicator light.......................................... 3-22, 7-31 Washing .................................................................... 10-2
OFF switch ........................................................... 7-31 Waxing and polishing .................................................. 10-3
Operation indicator light .................................. 3-20, 7-30 Wear indicators ........................................................ 11-37
System ................................................................. 7-28 Wheel
Warning light ................................................. 3-20, 7-30 Alignment .............................................................. 12-8
Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2 Aluminum ............................................................ 11-40
Balance............................................................... 11-37
W Nut tightening torque........................................ 9-6, 12-7
Warning and indicator lights .......................................... 3-9 Replacement........................................................ 11-39
Warning chimes Windows ................................................................... 2-20
Seatbelt ........................................................ 1-14, 3-10 Windshield
Warning light Washer fluid......................................................... 11-40
ABS ............................................................. 3-16, 7-26 Wiper and washer switches ..................................... 3-32
All-Wheel Drive...................................................... 3-20 Wiper blades........................................................ 11-42
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-15 Wiper deicer .......................................................... 3-34
Brake system ........................................................ 3-17 Winter
Charge ................................................................. 3-14 Driving ................................................................... 8-8
CHECK ENGINE ................................................... 3-12 Tires ........................................................... 8-10, 11-33
Coolant temperature high ........................................ 3-13 Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-31
Door open............................................................. 3-20 Wiper deicer .............................................................. 3-34
Engine low oil level ................................................ 3-14
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Black plate (2,1)